JP2020127729A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling a player to recognize operation related to a game excellently when transferring across many kinds of game states.SOLUTION: A sub control board is provided with determination processing (S2025) which generates a period in which to perform shooting unnecessary notification processing S2003 without outputting right shooting information in the case where performance of variable display for a necessary remaining number of times or longer until an upper limit (upper limit game frequency) of a time shortening frequency is reached in a short-term time shortening game state or long-term time shortening game state to be transferred afterward before a special game state equivalent to ending of first jackpot 2, 5 is over or before the long-term time shortening game state is over as operation notification control processing (S2025:Y). Thus, it is possible to avoid situations in which a player is made to consume extra game balls while aiming at performance of more variable display than necessary for performance of the time shortening game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters the starting opening during the normal gaming state and the variation display is executed with the start winning, and if the big hit is won by the lottery based on the start winning, the big hit is won. There is known a configuration in which a corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed and then a special game state is entered, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can be won into a winning opening. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning occurs during execution of the variable display based on the start winning, the execution of the variable display for the other starting winning can be held up to a predetermined maximum number. A configuration having a holding function is also known. Furthermore, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state, or in a probability variation gaming state, or in a gaming state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the starting opening than in the normal gaming state. It is also known that such a situation occurs, and those game states can be continued up to a predetermined upper limit number of times of play, thereby diversifying the game.

JP, 2005-074175, A

In the above conventional gaming machine, it is preferable that the gaming machine maker side allows the player to appropriately recognize the operation related to the game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states, and there is still room for improvement.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and for example, a gaming machine capable of causing a player to suitably recognize an operation related to a game when transitioning between a plurality of types of game states. It is intended to be provided.

A gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to solve the above problems,
A game area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and the player can change the flow-down start position in the game area. In the game area, a predetermined first operation state by the player is set. A first flow-down area in which the game ball flows down and a second flow-down area in which the game ball flows down in a second operation state different from the first operation state and different from the first operation state are provided. A gaming machine,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied,
A display device capable of performing a variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied and displaying the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result after the variable display.
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the variable display by the display device, a holding means capable of holding the execution of the variable display for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starter which is provided in the first flow-down area and which fulfills the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters;
A second starter which is provided in the second flow-down area, takes a plurality of states in which the game balls have different easiness of entering, and the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied when the game balls enter;
A variable winning portion that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game balls enter,
Gaming state control means for generating a plurality of types of gaming states by at least controlling the easiness of entering the game ball in the second starting part and the easiness of entering the game ball in the variable winning part,
Operation instruction information output means for outputting operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state or the second operation state in each game state controlled by the game state control means,
As the game state,
A first-side game state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the first flow-down region flow down than the second flow-down region,
An easy prize winning game state including a period that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won and the variable prize unit takes a state in which a game ball easily enters,
The result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined, including one or more variable displays executed after the easy winning game state and display of the result information after the one or more variable displays. The game state in which the game state transitions to the first side game state when displayed until reaching the upper limit number of games, and when the result information corresponding to winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information, the first There is provided an advantageous game state in which the game state to be transitioned after the result information is displayed is determined depending on the condition that the player is more likely to transit to the advantageous game state than the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the side game state. ,
The operation instruction information output means,
First operation instruction information output means for outputting first operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state during the first side game state,
Second operation instruction information output means for outputting second operation instruction information corresponding to execution of the game in the second operation state during the easy winning game state and the advantageous game state,
Before the end of the easy-winning prize game state, if the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times required to reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state to be transitioned thereafter is suspended by the suspending means Or, before the end of the advantageous game state, when the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times or more necessary for reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspension means, A second operation instruction non-output means for generating a period in which the second operation instruction information is not output is provided.

With the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to suitably recognize a game-related operation when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in still another open state Pachinko machine front view Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of the game board Back side perspective view of a pachinko machine Rear view of a pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Exploded perspective view of the central structure Enlarged view of region E1 in FIG. Perspective view of the top plate decoration, upper left front decoration, and upper right front decoration seen from the back side Partial cross section of central structure The figure which looked at the partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 16 from the front. Front view of central structure Figure explaining the shape of the downflow passage Enlarged view of region E2 in FIG. Diagram explaining the upper and lower stages Exploded perspective view of the game board Front view of movable body Diagram showing the case where the movable body is placed in the initial position The figure which shows the case where a movable body is arranged at the variable display position. The figure which shows the case where a movable body is arrange|positioned at an intermediate position. Diagram showing the case where the movable body is arranged at the irradiation position Diagram showing the relationship between the special symbol lottery content and the transitioning game state Flowchart showing the progress control of the gaming state Timing chart showing the control of the main control board at the start of the short-time short game state Flowchart showing operation notification control processing by the sub-control board

Regarding the embodiment of the game machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of game machine, will be described, and then a modified example and other kinds of game machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be sequentially described.

<Structural composition>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Showing. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and these parts are relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting unit that supports the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in a game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable component, but the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and the main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is removed. The support mechanism for supporting and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body part may be provided in the island facility.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (on the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 pivots on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation front end side.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, at an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the outer frame 101 so as to be separated from each other. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101 supports the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 from below, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. When the plug is inserted, it is configured to be rotatable. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detaching operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. In contrast, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined detaching operation of opening the intermediate block 103 by a certain amount or more with respect to the outer frame 101 and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. It As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the middle block 103, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the middle block 103, and the middle block 103 and the rear block 104 are separated by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detaching operation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock or lock the block locking mechanism is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed by an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 143, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to the leftward rotation operation on the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 144, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism that restricts opening/closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. The rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism allows the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103 to switch between a state in which opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

The rear block opening/closing restricting mechanism is configured by, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, two opening/closing restricting parts 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing restricting part 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. The three opening/closing restriction units 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change a state of engagement with an opening portion arranged so as to overlap with each other in the closed state of the rear block 104 by a rotation operation, whereby an open/close prohibited posture corresponding to the open/close prohibited state. And an opening/closing allowable posture corresponding to the opening/closing allowed state can be switched. When all the turning pieces 151A to 151C are set in the opening/closing permitted postures, the respective turning pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 is brought into the opening/closing permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open/close prohibited posture and the open/close permitted posture may be switched between the open/close prohibited state and the open/close permitted state by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and is configured to rotate only at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members of each device move between a plurality of postures.

Of the three turning pieces 151A to 151C, two turning pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to some of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open/close prohibited state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotation piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotation pieces 151A to 151C to the open/close permissible postures only by the operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, and thus, the crime prevention performance is achieved. Has been increased.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism that restricts the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow-down restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction change section 162 provided in the front block 102. The downflow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restriction piece 161 is in a movement-allowed state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, the restriction. The changing portion 162 pushes the intermediate block 103 toward the rear side thereof. The flow-down restricting piece 161 is arranged rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitting state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is in the open state), the pressing of the flow-down restricting piece 161 by the restriction changing portion 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the flow-down control piece 161 is set in a movement prohibited state in which it projects toward the front block 102 side. The flow-down restriction piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

In the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front side (left side in rear view). An open/closed detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block is provided is provided, and as shown in FIG. An open/close detection switch 109 is provided for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed with respect to 103.

Next, the configurations of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be sequentially described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of functional parts are attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front surface side of the base frame 201, a front decoration 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that includes the front view central portion of the front block 102. It has been installed. In the state where the base frame 201 that constitutes the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210</b>A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range except the outer peripheral portion where the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, It is provided with an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing the game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by the player for firing the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, in the front block 102, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a portion that protrudes forward on the lower side of the opening 210A. Upper protrusion 217, a lower protrusion 218 that is located below the upper protrusion 217 and protrudes forward, and an upper protrusion 217 and a lower protrusion that are on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219, which is formed in a substantially flat region located on the far side of 218 and in which the firing operation device 250 is disposed, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A that is formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. The central panel 220 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light transmissive member fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. Front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted on the rear side of the panel frame 221 in a substantially parallel manner with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. The main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, a storage portion 231, a ball removing mechanism (not shown), and a ball removing operation member 232 that operates the ball removing mechanism. In the storage portion 231, an inlet 231A for allowing a game ball to flow from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage portion 231, and an outlet (not shown) for causing the game ball to flow from the storage portion 231 into the pachinko machine 100, A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outflow port is provided. By opening this discharge port, the game balls are discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outflow port and the discharge port.

The game ball acquired according to the progress of the game and the game ball lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. In addition, the storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and through this opening portion, a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted, or a game ball that is rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage portion 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the outlet are formed (the upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, the pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member 232 is performing the ball removing operation, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage part 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) of the game ball and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1), and the discharge port 241B. A ball removing mechanism 243 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 and a ball removing operation member 242 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 are provided. The game balls and the like acquired in accordance with the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage part 231 is full, it flows into the storage part 241 through the inflow port 241A. In addition, even in response to the ball-removing operation on the ball-removing operation member 232, the game ball flows into the reservoir 241 from the reservoir 231 through the inflow port 241C.

The bottom surface of the storage portion 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge opening 241B is opened by a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 242, it remains in the open state until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removing operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) that detects whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and a firing handle 252 It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for invalidating the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotationally operated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at a strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or if the firing operation is invalidated by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is being rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launch device 330.

Further, behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper center edge portion 211A, an upper left edge portion 211B and an upper right edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper center edge portion 211A, and an upper left edge portion. It has a left side edge portion 211D located below 211B and a right side edge portion 211E located below the upper right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission is performed corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge part 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge part 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right side edge part 211C. The device 273, the left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and the right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E are configured. Each of the frame light-emitting devices 271-275 is a light-emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light-emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and these electronic components are integrated and electrically connected. And a printed circuit board.

In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 5, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G are provided above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and the upper left acoustic output port 211F is provided. A left upper acoustic device 281 and a right upper acoustic device 282 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 10) are provided corresponding to the respective upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be positioned at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper protrusion 217. The gaming ball lending device 290 is a frequency display device 291 for displaying a numerical value corresponding to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side on the pachinko machine 100, and lending a gaming ball. It includes a lending operation device 292 that is operated by the player when receiving the money, and a return operation device 293 that is operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted in the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and the numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated along with the renting of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, an equivalent of a banknote corresponding to the balance or a card recording the balance is returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation different from the shooting operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up/down/left/right direction operation. With these operation devices 261-263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100, an apparatus setting operation for setting the volume and the light amount of each apparatus executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute information setting operation, etc. that enables the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting the information, and these operations can be performed by the player or the manager of the game hall as necessary. It is said that. The input operation unit with which the player touches in the input operation device 260 (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) is rotated, moved up and down by an input operation unit drive unit such as a motor or a solenoid, or It is preferable that the operation such as the vibration is configured to be executable by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub control board 940 (see FIG. 10 )), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effect accompanied by the input operation, such as positively prompting the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104, a function of bringing the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 into an integrated state. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and the base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the main control unit 370, a launching unit 330 (see FIG. 3) for ejecting, a main control unit 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in a centralized manner. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effect and status notification.

In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and the plurality of wirings inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting device 271 to 271). 275, the upper left audio device 281 and the upper right audio device 282) and the devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 or the rear block 104 for electrical connection. The signal relay device 311 including the wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 is a flat plate-shaped base body 401 having through holes through which game balls such as a discharge port 401A can pass forward and backward, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base body 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that curves smoothly from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. The attached recoil prevention member 405 is provided. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball shot from a launching device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel, and returns to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property for preventing a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is formed of a material such as a vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion of the front block 102 on the rear surface side. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 in the direction of the launching path 401B, and the launching device 330 launches it but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling within the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is partitioned into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220 into a substantially planar shape, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400 in a substantially planar shape. It is divided into Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launch device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). ), a firing mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the firing position, a firing solenoid 334 (see FIG. 10) that drives the firing mechanism 333, and a game ball that is fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing path 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

As shown in FIG. 4, main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a two-part structure that houses main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thereby, not only the back side (front surface side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back surface side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 on the game board 400. It can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main controller 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main controller 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for housing the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a light-transmissive board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. In addition, in FIG. 7, a movable body 710 (see FIG. 22) described later is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, a flow-down change member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the flow-down direction or flow-down speed of a game ball, and a center located approximately in the center of the base body 401. The structure 420, the starting device according to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420 (specifically, the lower middle starting prize winning device 431), and the right to the central structure 420. The starting device (specifically, the right starting winning device 432) according to the second special symbol arranged on the lower side, and the large winning devices 433, 434 (specifically, the downstream starting device 432 arranged on the downstream side of the right starting winning device 432). Is a right big winning device 433 and a central big winning device 434), a starting device 436 related to a normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and on the upper right side of the game board 400, and up and down. The winning combination operation device 435 is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the special winning devices 433, 434, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B are arranged on both right and left sides of the central winning device 434. In addition, the game board 400 is arranged in the upper middle starting winning device 632, the upper middle starting winning device 632 that functions similarly to the right starting winning device 432 as a starting device according to the second special symbol, and the central structure 420. It is provided with a general winning device 639 arranged on the left side and having the same functions as the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned lower middle starting winning device 431 (see FIG. 10) and corresponds to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a first start prize switch (first start prize switch 441) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start prize device 431, and a second start prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right start prize device 432 ( Second start prize switch 442), a second start prize switch (second start prize switch 642) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start prize device 632, right that detects a game ball that has entered the right big prize device 433 Big prize switch 443, central big prize switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered the central big prize device 434, winning combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the winning combination actuating device 435, and game that has entered the starting device 436. A start switch 446 that detects a ball, a non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the right special winning device 433, and the inside of the right special winning device 433 Specific passage switch 448 that detects the game ball that entered the specified passage (not shown), general prize switches 449A and 449B that detect the game balls that entered the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B, enter the general prize device 639 A general winning switch 649 or the like for detecting each game ball is installed on the game board 400.

The central structure body 420 and the entrance part of the game ball of the starting device 436 constitute a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Each winning device, specifically, the lower middle starting winning device 431, the right starting winning device 432, the upper middle starting winning device 632, the right big winning device 433, the central big winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B, 639. The entrance portion of the game sphere constitutes a winning opening, and the gaming sphere that has entered each winning opening passes through a through hole formed in the base 401, and a collecting and discharging passage formed on the back side of the base 401 (not shown in FIG. 7). To be shown). Further, the game balls that have not entered the respective winning devices are guided to the collecting and discharging passage through the discharging port 401A provided at the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game ball guided to the collecting and discharging passage is discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulating device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, a lower middle starting winning device 431 and an upper middle starting winning device 632) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by, and the starting device such as the lower middle starting winning device 431 does not necessarily have to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. The game ball may be used as a ball entrance that is released to the game area again without being paid out.

The lower middle starting winning a prize device 431 concerning the first special symbol and the upper middle starting winning a prize device 632 concerning the second special symbol, and each of the general winning device 439A, the general winning device 439B, and the general winning device 639, to them. The approach probability of the game ball is not changed, and the entered game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. In addition, the right start winning a prize device 432 which relates to the 2nd special design has the mechanism which changes the entry probability of the game sphere inside that. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the right starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol, instead of or in addition to it, the first special symbol or the second special symbol. You may provide in any one or some of the starting device which concerns on, general winning a prize device 439A, 439B, and 639. Further, the mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right starting prize winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is a right entry regulation mechanism 452 that changes the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the right entry regulation mechanism. And a right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry regulation solenoid 462, and when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning hole). Due to the arrangement, the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the entry permitting posture, the movable piece is arranged to guide the game ball into the entrance. The ball can enter the right start winning device 432. The right-entry restricting mechanism 452 is the right-entry when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is selected by a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") based on the fact that the starting switch 446 detects the game ball. In response to the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the approaching attitude is changed a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the right big winning device 433 has a right entry regulation mechanism 453 for regulating entry of a game ball into the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permission posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a right entry regulation. The right approach restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 453, and the transition between the non-guided attitude and the guided attitude allows the game ball that has entered the right big winning device 433 to become a non-specific path or a specific path. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the distribution mechanism to switch the destination of the game ball are provided. When the right entry regulation mechanism 453 of the right big winning device 433 is in the entry prohibited posture, the right entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the right big winning device 433. When the right entry regulation mechanism 453 is in the entry permitted posture, the right entry regulation mechanism 453 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the right big winning device 433. Further, when the game ball that has entered the right big winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the sorting mechanism is in the non-guided posture that projects forward, and when the sorting mechanism is in the guided posture that retracts backward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided for diversifying the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given a favorable game state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the central big winning device 434 has a central entry regulation mechanism 454 for regulating entry of a game ball into the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permission posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a center entry regulation. A central entry regulation solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the central entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the central entry regulation mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the central big winning device 434, but the central entry regulation mechanism 454. Is a permitted position for entry, the central entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the central prize winning device 434.

In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibited posture as a mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452, etc., each mechanism is configured to form a winning opening (or a ball entrance) of each device. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I wish I had it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and the entry of the game ball is allowed even in the normal state, In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the right big winning device 433 and the central big winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, a lottery based on a game ball that has entered the lower middle starting prize winning device 431 related to the first special symbol being detected by the first starting prize winning switch 441 (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"). ), or that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 related to the second special symbol is detected by the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 642. In the case of winning the lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”), at least one of the right entry regulation solenoid 463 and the central entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the right approach regulation mechanism 453 and the central approach regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry permission posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift of the right approach regulation mechanism 453 to the approaching allowable posture, and switches after a predetermined time from the shift to the guiding posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The winning combination operation device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the right big winning device 433 and the center big winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the big hit lottery, either the right big winning device 433 or the central big winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 has passed. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. In addition, it is not always necessary that either the right big winning device 433 or the central big winning device 434 starts the operation on the condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 has passed, and instead of that, or In addition, either the right big winning device 433 or the central big winning device 434 may start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times games are held. A display device having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are preliminarily divided into light emitting areas corresponding to the respective devices, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, with the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is variably displayed, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. With the special symbol display device 471 relating to the special symbol and the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is variably displayed, or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game related to the first special symbol is held, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game related to the second special symbol is held A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are respectively reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a one-time game executed based on one start prize, and a lottery determination based on the lottery determination based on the start/win determination based on one start prize. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431 is detected by the first starting winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10). However, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right starting prize winning device 432 or the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 is the second starting prize winning switch 442 or the second. Even if it is detected by the 2 start winning a prize switch 642 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol are the number of holding times depending on the combination of the light emitting states (lighting off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units. indicate.

Further, in the game board 400, with the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is variably displayed, or the normal symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the normal symbol is related. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the right to hold a unit game is held is provided. The right to the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball entering the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, the design is expressed by the light emitting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol holding display device 478 displays the number of holding times by a combination of the light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is variably displayed or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed so as to be overlapped behind the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and final display of the decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variation display and confirmation display of the decorative symbol are not always changed at the same timing, or the display is stopped as the confirmation display. There is no need to set it, and it may be set so that a slight time difference is provided at each timing and the fluctuation starts at substantially the same timing, and the confirmation display is performed at substantially the same timing.

In addition, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940. Various light effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). Correspond.

The first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set to win the jackpot with approximately the same probability, and, for example, win the jackpot at approximately 1/23. If you win the jackpot in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, either the right big winning device 433 or the central big winning device 434 starts operating, to the winning opening for the player A special game state occurs in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by winning the prize. The number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit is set differently depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery is won. For example, if you win the first special symbol lottery, you can get a certain prize ball (for example, about 150) with a probability of about 77%, and win the prize ball with a probability of remaining 23% without winning. Can not. When the second special symbol lottery is won, it is set to be easier to obtain a large number of award balls than when the first special symbol lottery is won, and a large number of award balls (for example, approximately 250) are set with a probability of approximately 25%. It is possible to obtain, and it is possible to obtain a small number of prize balls (for example, about 150 balls) with a probability of remaining 75%.

Further, when the big hit in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, it shifts to the time saving game state with a preset probability. The probability of shifting to the time saving game state is set differently depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery is won, and is also set differently depending on the game state in which the winning occurs. For example, if you win the first special symbol lottery, if the winning in the normal game state is about 30%, in the time saving game state 100% to move to the time saving game state and win the second special symbol drawing In this case, it is set so that it is easier for the player to shift to a gaming state that is more advantageous than the winning of the first special symbol lottery, and regardless of the gaming state, it shifts to the time saving gaming state at 100%.

The time saving game state is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state, and the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery The winning probability is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "low probability state"). In addition, the time saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, once or 87 times), but then returns to the normal game state. .. The total number of unit games in which the time saving game state continues (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of time saving) is different depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery is won, and the win occurs. It is set differently depending on the played game state. For example, if you win the first special symbol lottery, if the winning in the normal gaming state, one time saving time is selected with approximately 70% probability, one time saving time is selected with approximately 30% probability To be done. Also, if you win the first special symbol lottery during the time saving game state, and if you win the second special symbol lottery during the normal game state and time saving game state, the first special symbol lottery during the normal game state It is easier to select the shorter working hours than when the winning case is won, and 87 working hours are selected with a probability of 100%. The details of the settings relating to the game state transition control will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and the like.

In the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, a small lottery lottery is executed in addition to the big jackpot. When the big hit is not won, the small win may be won, and when the small hit is won, the right big winning device 433 operates for a short time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). Take a position that allows entry. It corresponds to whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage (a part of the passage provided inside the right big winning device 433) during the period when the right big winning device 433 is operating based on the winning of the small hit. Then, it is different whether or not to give a game state advantageous to the player. For example, when the game ball enters the specific passage, the right winning a prize device 433 starts to operate again as an advantageous game state, and the entry allowable attitude is maintained for a certain time (for example, about 1.8 seconds). To take. When the game ball enters the specific passage in the operation of the right big winning device 433 for the second time after winning the small hit, the right to operate the right big winning device 433 is granted again, and this operation is performed. The process is continued until the number of times reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 3 times).

Here, the advantageous game state when the game ball enters the specific passage is not limited to the configuration by the operation of the right special winning device 433 again, but instead or in addition thereto, another advantageous game You may give a state. For example, a gaming state that is a time saving state, and a state in which the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "high probability state") In "also referred to as "probability variation game state"), it may be maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 87 times) good.

Note that the game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration, and may have a configuration further including a game state different from each of the above-mentioned game states, depending on a condition different from the above condition. The configuration may be such that the game states are changed.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number related to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, various variation pattern random numbers are generated, and various game states. In the case where the game ball that has entered the lower middle starting prize device 431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the first starting prize switch 441 (see FIG. 10), the starting prize of the first special symbol is obtained. At the time of starting winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number, the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game relating to the first special symbol. If the right of is not reserved, it starts immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved , After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize, the unit game based on the present starting prize is started. When each random number is obtained based on the starting prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the present starting prize after the special game state. It is started after the unit game relating to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is obtained based on the starting winning of the second special symbol after the present starting winning, the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The unit game based on the starting prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be configured to be executed in preference to the unit game relating to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order of the starting prize. The unit predominant control according to may be executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be changed at the same time.

When the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, in addition, based on the obtained jackpot symbol random number, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery ( The type of jackpot pattern) is determined. The type of this stop symbol corresponds to the type of jackpot, and for example, the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times the right approach regulation mechanism 453 or the central approach regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture (for example, 3 rounds, 4 rounds and 5 rounds). There are multiple types of jackpots corresponding to the types of gaming states, such as the three types of settings) and the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state) after the special gaming state, and jackpots are set for each type. The design is set. When the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current game state, lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various fluctuation pattern random numbers, the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the first special The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the variation occurs in the first special symbol. The variable display is continued in a fixed pattern over the display time, and in the decorative pattern, the variable display according to the change pattern is continued over the variable display time. Then, with the passage of the variable display time, the stop symbol relating to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

If the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the fixed display of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state. In the special game state, the right entry restriction mechanism 453 of the right big winning device 433 and the central entry restriction mechanism 454 of the central big winning device 434 are allowed to enter a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443, 444 in each of the allowable entry postures of the central approach regulation mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum allowable entry time ( For example, when 29.5 seconds) have elapsed, one round ends, and the central approach regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibited posture. After that, after the passage of a predetermined entry prohibition time, the central entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission posture again.

The right approach regulation mechanism 453 and the central approach regulation mechanism 454 are configured such that only one of them takes the entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) ), one of them moves to the first approach allowable posture. In addition, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed from the final return to the entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed after that (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the state shifts to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 related to the second special symbol is detected by the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 642, 2 Start prize with special symbols. The control of the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol described above. That is, when the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number relating to the special symbol is acquired, and the unit game based on this starting winning is executed. To be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variable display, and the transition control of the game state, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. To be done.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not retained up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the normal symbol, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already-acquired normal symbol ends.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the player has won based on the value of the winning random number, and if it is won, a predetermined hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time saving state, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern for a predetermined variation display time, and in the time saving state. The variable display is continued in a fixed pattern for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the lapse of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry permission posture at least once. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving game state and probability variation game state), the predetermined maximum allowable entry time is longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state (for example, about 2.4 seconds). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into two times) to shift to the entry permission posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is detected by the second start winning a prize switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time. In addition, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the present normal symbol is completed even if the number of times of transition to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery related to the right starting prize winning device 432, first, it is necessary to win in the normal symbol lottery, and further, the game ball in the entry permitted state of the right starting winning prize device 432 based on the winning. The right start winning device 432 must be entered. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the right start winning device 432 is allowed to enter based on the winning probability in the normal gaming state. Since 0.1 second) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, approximately 2.4 seconds), in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol lottery relating to the right starting winning device 432 is performed. The opportunity per unit time that can be received is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time that can receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time saving game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, aims to shift to the probability variation game state by entering the game ball into the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time saving game state and the probability variation game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery related to the right starting winning device 432 before each game state ends.

Specifically, in the game board 400, a central structure 420 is provided in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and the game balls are mainly provided on the right side of the central structure 420 within the range where the game balls do not flow down. It is configured to selectively perform a flow-down game method (left-handed game method) and a game method mainly flown through the right side of the central structure 420 (right-handed game method). A player plays a game by the left-handed game technique in the normal game state, and plays a game by the right-handed game technique in the time saving game state. In addition, the right big winning device 433 and the center big winning device 434 are arranged at positions where the game balls flowing down the right side with respect to the central structure 420 can enter, and even in the special game state, the game is performed by the right hitting game technique. ..

In addition, the upper middle start winning a prize device 632 which relates to the 2nd special design which is located in the upper part of central structure 420 can enter the game ball in the situation where the game ball is made to flow down with the left hitting game technique. .. The upper middle starting winning device 632 is set to enter a game ball with a very low probability (for example, a probability of about 1/60) as compared with the lower middle starting winning device 431. The second special symbol lottery received by the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632, the player can easily obtain a value (gaming value) for playing the game, as compared to the first special symbol lottery, and it is a big hit. If the player wins, there is a high probability that the game will shift to the time saving game state, and the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the special game state is also large. Therefore, during the period of playing the game by the left-handed gaming method in the normal game state, not only the expectation of the big hit by the first special symbol lottery to the lower middle starting prize winning device 431, but also the upper middle starting winning prize device that rarely occurs Since the second special symbol lottery is executed by the entry of the game ball into 632, it is possible to always expect a chance to obtain a large game value.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base body 501. The base block 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported by the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and the game balls tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game balls, and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment section, a case rail 530 as a ball guide section for guiding a game ball flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of the game ball on the downstream side of the case rail 530. A payout device 540 that rents out game balls, and a guide as a ball guide portion that guides the game balls flowing out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game balls and the lending of the game balls by the payout device 540, and a power supply that converts external power into power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply/launch control device 570 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the launch of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operating device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a payout control device 560. The game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 are provided.

The base body 501 is integrally molded of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front portion and a protective cover portion 503 located rearward of the base portion 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, to which other devices are attached. It has a function as an attached part.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but covers a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103, such as a part of the main control device 370, which needs frequent inspection and confirmation, to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window portion for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of vent holes 503A having a function of improving the heat radiation performance of the heat generation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the game ball tank 510 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from a ball circulating device (not shown) of the island facility. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 gently inclines in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined also in the direction (front-back direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, on the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width that allows the game balls to pass in a row, and the height gradually increases as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. Is provided with a rectifying member 522 that has a top surface portion that lowers and gradually rectifies the game balls that flow down the passage from a vertically overlapping height to a one-step height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side and guides the game ball to the opposite side of the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically long so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and game balls from the tank rail 520 flow in. The case rail 530 is curved downward to the left and right so as not to forcefully flow the game balls, and continues downward. Further, a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a ball shortage is attached to an intermediate portion of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The storage ball switch 591 detects a ball out condition in which a game ball is not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to a ball clogging or the like occurring on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive unit for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game balls.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 are attached so as to overlap with the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned on the lower rear surface side of the rear block 104. Has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of unsealing, like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a substrate case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply/launch control device 570 includes a power supply/launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a substrate case that houses the power/launch control board 900. The power/launch control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. And is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power/launch control board 900, a power monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that, in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Below, these major control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

The power supply/launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the drawing), and a firing device according to an operation of the firing operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 that controls the drive of 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, AC 24 V) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal electric power (for example, DC 24 V), and generates various electric power from the internal electric power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is electric power of a drive voltage (for example, DC 12 V) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. It includes power for a control voltage (for example, DC 5 V) for controlling the power supply, power for a backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various kinds of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power monitoring board 910 is supplied with power of internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. Electric power of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these electric powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Electric power of a drive voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage. Electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the acquisition of external power is stopped. Note that the power switch 909 is turned off, or the power plug (not shown) connected to the power source unit 901 via the power switch 909 is pulled out from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so as to return to the current control state.

The firing control unit 902 cooperates with the main control board 920 to control the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330. The ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920 on condition that it is not operated. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay section 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, and thereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input aiming at a section where a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, the low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout speed). The payout speed of the game balls from the device 540 is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 which has received the high speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 supplies power between the power supply/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920, and transmits various signals, and a power supply monitoring section 911 that monitors the power supply state from the power/fire control board 900. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power source unit 901. When the state in which the voltage is less than 22 V continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power is in a power failure state, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 integrally controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. RAM (not shown) for storing the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown), etc. are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (backup) the internal data by the power supply of the backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls a payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to an operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with other devices, and for example, bidirectional information input/output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Is connected to the open/close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. Like the RAM of the main control board 920, the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the above, the internal data may not be maintained in the power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls operations of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like, based on an instruction from the main control board 920. The sub control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting to another device so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are bidirectionally connected for information communication, and the decorative pattern display device 479 and the like are connected only for one-way information output communication.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when a power failure state is restored and a main processing that is periodically interrupted (in this embodiment, at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). The timer interrupt processing is performed.

First, the main processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initial setting processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. , After that, interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting interruption, and winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) and jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) related to special symbols and ordinary symbols A random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a partial area of the RAM), and a first variation type counter to a fourth variation type for determining a variation time, a variation pattern, and the like. The fluctuation counter updating process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting the interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request is issued before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 that sets an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. A startup standby process S1003 that waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub control board 940, and the like stand up is executed.

After the startup standby process S1003, a determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply/launch control board 900, a determination process S1005 of the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and a storage Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and based on these determination results, it is determined whether or not to delete the stored information in the RAM. Here, the saved information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power outage, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power outage, and is executed. The value of the counter regarding the unit game in the inside, the value of the counter stored by the starting winning, and the like are illustrated.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state. ), it is determined whether the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the 2's complement of the checksum value, is “0” (determination processing S1007), and the current checksum value It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not the predetermined power failure value indicating that the saving information has been saved and completed at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saving When the information is not normally retained (S1007:N), the RAM clear processing S1008 of erasing the stored information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the storage information is normally stored (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clearing process S1008 is executed, a hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920. Wear initialization processing S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 of determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010:N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (recovery command Output process S1012). The control state of the main control board 920 is returned to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state by the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010:Y), various information is initialized without restoring the retained information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM restoration setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error statuses such as fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure status. Even if occurs, all of those error states are canceled. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 which have received the return command or the initialization command. Also in each of the above, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

After the initial setting (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014) of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup, if the condition device was operating at the time of the transition to the previous power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are made (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation during the power failure state is executed in the sub control board 940. It

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state flag is set or not to determine whether it is the time saving state or the non-time saving state (determination process S1016), which is the time saving state. In this case (S1016:Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016:N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (partial area of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors is sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various types of main processing will be individually described.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output status of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected for all three times, it is determined to be the power failure state. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power outage, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that there is a power outage, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM restoration setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform substantial control such as progress of games and monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. It Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each processing of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circulation initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and multiple counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter relating to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter relating to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the special value is changed. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Also for the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique values to those counters, the winning random number initial related to the special symbol It is updated as in the case of the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the first fluctuation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to these counters. To be done.

In addition, the winning random number counter, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selecting counter, and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the above counter may be configured as another configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using the initial value counter, or may be configured to use a random number generation IC without using a program and refer to the value as needed. ..

In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the game stop value is updated and various kinds of information for stopping the progress of the game are set. On the other hand, if the injustice detection information is not the injustice detection value or is already the game stop value, each process for stopping the game progress is not executed and the game stop determination process S1206 ends. The fraud detection information is set to the fraud detection value when various fraud occurrences are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in the determination processing S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol Normally, signals for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 are output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach regulation solenoid 462, a right approach regulation solenoid 463, a central approach regulation solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are operated. A control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the first start prize switch 441, the second start prize switch 442, 642, the right big prize switch 443, the center big prize switch 444, the winning combination operation switch 445, the start switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447. The signal states from the specific passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A, 449B, 649 are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals and the signals from the various switches are read. For each of the following, a signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) A change in the detection state of each switch is detected based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined to be the on state transition. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the ON state of various switches is immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even if it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, and fraud monitoring are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering the game ball into various prize winning devices or forcibly operating the various prize winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the right big winning device 433, and the central big winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the admission allowable posture, and the game balls are guided to a specific passage of the right big winning device 433 by vibration. , Induction of forced malfunction of the right start winning device 432, the right big winning device 433 and the central big winning device 434 by radio waves, induction of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, lower middle starting winning device 431 In a situation in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guiding a game ball to the right start winning device 432, the upper middle starting winning device 632, the right big winning device 433 and the central big winning device 434 at an abnormal timing is performed. Detect occurrence.

In the winning detection response processing S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the first start prize switch 441 (see FIG. 10), if the first start prize switch detection flag is set, the medium start prize counter (predetermined RAM Area) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. If the second start prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the second start prize switch 442, 642 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the right big prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right big prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the central big prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10). When the central big prize switch detection flag is set on the basis, the big prize counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the firing control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launching device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). It is detected whether (see 3) is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is decremented by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, a prize is awarded to the main control board 920 every time the control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, three) corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). When the ball command is requested and the payout of the prize balls is continued, the main control board 920 outputs a further prize ball command. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated corresponding to a prize (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is paid out. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the right big winning device. Operation control of 433 and the central prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related processing S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the right big winning device. Operation control of 433 and the central prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol related processing S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol reserved display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 or the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is combined. The combined output data is output to each device in the next control signal output process S1208 based on the timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Change in the moving direction of the game ball made by the central structure 420>
Next, referring mainly to FIGS. 13 to 16, a configuration in which the moving direction of the game ball flowing down the game area is changed by the central structure 420 will be described. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the central structure 420. More specifically, FIG. 13 shows that some members (top plate decoration 611, upper left front decoration) mounted on the front side upper part of the central structure 420 facing the player (that is, the front side). FIG. 612 is a perspective view of the upper right front decoration 613) exploded with respect to other members.

As shown in FIG. 13, the top plate decoration 611 is provided with a roof 611B protruding from a position inside the upper end on the back surface of the decoration main body 611A visually recognized by the player. The roof 611B is formed in a smoothly curved shape that is convex upward and has the apex at the approximate center of the top plate decoration 611. The edge of the roof 611B opposite to the joint with the decoration main body 611A is in contact with the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side, so that the roof 611B can be separated from the rear surface of the decoration main body 611A and the central structure 420. Together with the front surface of the main body side, is configured as a ball passage whose upper side is open.

Therefore, a part of the game ball that is launched from the launching device 330 and enters the upper game area (hereinafter also referred to as “upper game area”) with respect to the central structure 420 flows down the upper game area, and then the roof 611B. Can be reached. As described above, the roof 611B is configured in a curved shape that is convex upward, so that the game ball that has reached the roof 611B is a roof depending on conditions such as its arrival position and the moving direction of the game ball when it arrives. Roll on the 611B in the left direction (arrow Q1 direction) or the right direction (arrow Q2 direction).

In addition, a concave portion 611C that guides the game ball to the main body side of the central structure 420 is provided at approximately the center (that is, approximately the top) of the roof 611B. A passage port 621 is provided at the tip of the recess 611C. As a result, the game ball that has reached the roof 611B can be guided to the passage opening 621 via the recess 611C, in addition to being discharged from the left end or the right end of the roof 611B by rolling in the left or right direction. That is, the roof 611B functions as a distribution unit (first distribution unit) that distributes the game balls reaching the roof 611B to the left or right or the passage opening 621.

On the upper right upper part of the main body side of the central structure 420, a partition section 624 is provided which partitions a game area flowing down by a left-handed gaming method and a game area flowing down by a right-handed gaming method. The partition portion 624 is in the form of a plate having an inclined surface that is inclined downward to the right with a fixed gap that allows the game ball to pass through with respect to the outer rail 402 (see FIG. 7) that forms the outer shape of the game area. The game ball that is formed and passes through the upper side of the partition portion 624 becomes a game ball that flows down by the right-handed game technique. On the other hand, the game ball that passes under the partition section 624 becomes a game ball that flows down by the left-handed game technique.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down by the left-handed game technique is only the game area continuous from the left side to the lower side with respect to the central structure 420 (hereinafter also referred to as “left side game area”). Instead, it goes through the central upper gaming area located between the left gaming area and the upper gaming area. The central upper game area is an area including the internal area of the central structure 420, and in the upper part of the central structure 420, the game balls correspond to the areas flowing down the left and right sides of the roof 611B, and the upper middle start winning device 632 is used. Including. Therefore, the upper middle start winning device 632 is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the left game area. On the other hand, the lower middle starting prize winning device 431 is provided in a part of the left side game area, and is arranged on the downstream side with respect to the center upper game area.

The movement route of the game balls sorted to the left and right by the roof 611B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. On the other hand, the game ball guided to the passage port 621 is guided to the distribution device 622 that is continuously provided to the passage port 621. The distribution device 622 is a device that functions as a second distribution unit, and distributes the guided game balls to the upper middle start winning device 632 or the outside of the starting winning device 632.

Below the distribution device 622, a flow-down restriction part 623 is provided. The flow-down restricting portion 623 is configured as an inclined surface whose upper surface inclines downward from right to left. The slanted surface of the flow-down restricting portion 623 is in contact with the back surfaces of the decorations 611, 612, and 613 and the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side, respectively, in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the game balls distributed to the outside of the upper middle start winning device 632 by the distribution device 622 fall on the downflow restriction unit 623, and are leftward by their own weight on the inclined surface of the downflow restriction unit 623 (arrow Q3 direction). ). As a result, the game ball enters the left game area (that is, the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420).

Here, the distribution device 622 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of the area E1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the distribution device 622 mainly includes a left distribution passage 622A, a right distribution passage 622B, and a stage 622C. The left distribution passage 622A is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered through the passage opening 621 to the left. On the other hand, the right distribution passage 622B is a passage that guides the game ball entering from the passage opening 621 to the right.

The stage 622C is provided on the downstream side of each of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B. Thereby, when the game ball passes through the left distribution path 622A, the game ball P enters from the left side of the stage 622C and rolls on the stage 622C, as shown in FIG. 13, for example. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the right distribution path 622B enters from the right side of the stage 622C and rolls on the stage 622C. Since the contact sensor 662 (see FIG. 10) is installed on each of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B, the game sensor enters the stage 622C from the contact sensor 662. Is detected based on the contact sensor signal of.

The stage 622C is provided with a recess 622D at substantially the center thereof. Recesses 622E and 622F are provided on the left and right sides of the recess 622D, respectively. Each of the recesses 622D, 622E, 622F is configured so that the game ball can be dropped from its front side (that is, the side that is the front side of the gaming machine). As a result, the game ball rolling on the stage 622C falls forward from the stage 622C via any of the recesses 622D, 622E, 622F.

An upper middle starting winning device 632 is provided in front of the stage 622C. The upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction by a driving device (not shown). Therefore, if the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 that is reciprocating is at the appropriate position at the timing when the game ball falls from the stage 622C through any of the recesses 622D, 622E, 622F, the upper middle starting winning prize device 632 is the stage. The game ball falling from 622C is received, and thereby the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632. As described above, the upper middle starting winning device 632 is a starting winning device relating to the second special symbol, like the right starting winning device 432. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the upper middle starting prize device 632 is detected by the second starting prize switch 642, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained.

On the other hand, when the upper middle starting winning device 632 is not in an appropriate position and the game ball dropped from the stage 622C cannot enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the game ball is, as described above, the downflow restriction unit 623. By falling, the game ball rolls leftward (arrow Q3 direction) on the inclined surface of the flow-down restricting portion 623 and is discharged to the left-side game area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, a movement route of the game balls distributed to the left or right direction (direction of arrow Q1 or arrow Q2) by the roof 611B will be described. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the top plate decoration 611, the upper left front decoration 612, and the upper right front decoration 613 as viewed from the back side. FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional view of the central structure 420 after removing the decoration bodies 611A, 612A, 613A of the decorations 611, 612, 613. The decoration bodies 611A, 612A, and 613A are portions that function as decoration means visually recognized by the player in the top plate decoration 611, the upper left front decoration 612, and the upper right front decoration 613.

As shown in FIG. 15, on the back surface of the decoration main body 612A of the upper left front decoration 612, downwardly extending passage walls 612B and 612C are provided upright with a predetermined width therebetween. As a result, a leftward flow-down passage 652 that is continuous in the vertical direction is formed between the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C. That is, the left downflow passage 652 functions as a warp path formed inside the central structure 420. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the roof 611B in the direction of the arrow Q1 (that is, the game ball distributed to the left side by the roof 611B) is guided to the downflow passage 652 which is the warp path and flows down the left downflow passage 652.

As shown in FIG. 16, a downflow restricting portion 623 is provided downstream of the left downflow passage 652. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left downflow passage 652 falls on the downflow restricting portion 623. As a result, the game ball rolls in the left direction (arrow Q3 direction) on the inclined surface of the flow-down restricting portion 623. That is, the game balls distributed to the left by the roof 611B flow down the left downflow passage 652, then roll leftward on the inclined surface of the downflow restricting portion 623, and are discharged to the left game area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, on the back surface of the decoration main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613, downwardly extending passage walls 613B and 613C are provided upright with a predetermined width therebetween. As a result, a rightward flow passage 653 that is continuous in the vertical direction is formed between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C. That is, the rightward flow passage 653 also functions as a warp path formed inside the central structure 420. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the roof 611B in the direction of the arrow Q2 (that is, the game ball distributed to the right by the roof 611B) is guided to the right downflow passage 653 which is the warp path and flows down through the right downflow passage 653. ..

Then, the game ball flowing down the right downflow passage 653 falls on the downflow restricting portion 623, and rolls on the inclined surface in the left direction (arrow Q3 direction). That is, the game balls sorted to the right by the roof 611B flow down the right downflow passage 653, then roll leftward on the inclined surface of the downflow restricting portion 623, and are discharged to the left game area.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B are allowed to enter the left side game area by passing through the right downflow passage 653 and the downflow restricting portion 623. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the pachinko machine 100, between the passage walls 612B and 612C, a plate-like protrusion 612D protruding from the rear surface of the ornament main body 612A is provided, and the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C. Is provided substantially parallel to the wall surface of the.

The protrusion 612D is formed such that the bottom surface (the surface in contact with the back surface of the ornament main body 612A) has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the continuous direction of the leftward flow passage 652 (that is, the vertical direction) and is adjacent to the longitudinal side of the bottom surface. The side surface (that is, the surface that is substantially parallel to the wall surfaces of the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C) is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width becomes narrower as the distance from the back surface of the decoration body 612A increases. In other words, the protrusion 612D is configured such that the height from the bottom surface, which is the installation surface for the ornament main body 612A, gradually increases from the longitudinal end of the bottom surface toward the inside. A plurality of (five in the example shown in FIG. 15) protrusions 612D are arranged side by side in a direction intersecting with the continuous direction of the leftward flow passage 652.

As shown in FIG. 16, a concave portion 652A corresponding to the shape of the protrusion 612D is formed on the surface of the leftward flow passage 652 that faces the protrusion 612D. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the leftward flow passage 652 is not vertically dropped, but is a path formed by the projection 612D and the concave portion 652A, that is, once toward the back side (bottom side of the concave portion 652A), then to the front side. Take the route back.

As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of protrusions 613D similar to the protrusion 612D are provided between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C also on the back surface of the ornament main body 613A of the upper right front ornament 613. Further, as shown in FIG. 16, a recess 653A corresponding to the shape of the protrusion 613D is formed on the surface of the right-flowing passage 653 facing the protrusion 613D. Therefore, as for the right downflow passage 653, the game ball is formed by the protrusion 613D and the recessed portion 653A, similarly to the left downflow passage 652, and once toward the back side (bottom side of the recessed portion 653A), the front side. Take the route back.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, on the back surface of the ornament main body 612A, a protrusion 612E extending in a slender direction is formed downstream of the left downflow passage 652 in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the left downflow passage 652. .. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, on the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side, at a position downstream of the protruding portion 612E, a direction similar to that of the protruding portion 612E and intersecting with the continuous direction of the left downflow passage 652. An elongated protrusion 652B is formed at the bottom. As a result, the game ball flows down the left downflow passage 652 while colliding with the protrusions 612E and 652B. Since the mechanical energy of the game ball is reduced by the collision with the protrusions 612E and 652B, the collision between the game ball and the flow-down restricting portion 623 can be softened.

The curved shape of the roof 611B is configured substantially symmetrically for the purpose of smoothing the distribution of the game balls to the left and right. On the other hand, the inclined surface of the flow-down restricting portion 623 is configured to be inclined downward from right to left. Therefore, inevitably, the distance until the game ball discharged from the left end of the roof 611B and flowing down the left downflow passage 652 reaches the downflow regulation unit 623 is discharged from the right end of the roof 611B and the right downflow passage 653 game ball is It is longer than the distance to reach the flow-down restricting portion 623. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the left end of the roof 611B and when the game ball is discharged from the right end of the roof 611B, there is a difference in energy when the game ball falls (collides) with the downflow restriction unit 623. Therefore, due to that, there is a possibility that the behavior of the game ball that has fallen into the flow-down restricting portion 623 becomes non-uniform.

On the other hand, as described above, the projections 612E and 652B which are not located downstream of the right downflow passage 653 are provided downstream of the left downflow passage 652, which has a longer downflow distance of the game balls than the right downflow passage 653. Therefore, regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to the left or right of the roof 611B, the behavior of the game ball that has fallen into the flow-down restriction unit 623 can be smoothed.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 16, in the central structure 420, a stage 625 is provided below the opening 420A provided near the center thereof. The game ball that has passed through the left warp passage 628 (see FIG. 17) formed inside the left side of the central structure 420 enters the stage 625. Since the contact sensor 665 (see FIG. 10) is installed on the passage of the left warp passage 628, the entry of the game ball into the stage 625 is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 665. It

The stage 625 is provided with three recesses 625A, 625B, 625C, and the game ball that has entered the stage 625 is distributed to any of these recesses 625A to 625C. When the game ball is distributed to the left-end recess 625B or the right-end recess 625C among the three recesses 625A to 625C, the game ball falls from the front of the stage 625 (front side of the gaming machine).

On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the central recess 625A enter the entrance 626 formed in the stage back cover 615 provided upright on the rear side of the stage 625 (on the back side of the gaming machine). The game ball that has entered the entrance 626 passes through a passage (not shown) that is formed inside the central structure 420 and that communicates with the entrance 626, and from a discharge opening 627 formed below the stage 625. Emitted. The function of the stage 625 will be described later.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the action and effect of the change in the moving direction of the game ball, which is made by the central structure 420, will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B can be made to enter the left side game area by passing through the right downflow passage 653 and the downflow restriction unit 623.

In a typical conventional gaming machine, the game balls distributed to the right by the distribution unit provided in the upper part of the central structure flow down the right side, and the game balls distributed to the left flow down the left side. That is, the behavior of the game balls distributed by the distribution unit also affects the downstream position of the game balls to the downstream side. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, when a starting winning device such as the lower middle starting winning device 431 is provided in the left gaming area (that is, the left gaming area) with respect to the central structure, the player is , Aiming directly to the left-side game area (left-handed game technique), or performing a shooting operation of the game ball so that the game ball is distributed to the left side by the distribution unit. As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, the starting position of the game ball aimed at by the player is uniform, and a large number of game balls flow down to one side where the privilege related to the game is easily given, such as the starting winning device. The player's firing operation was likely to be limited and lacked in unexpectedness.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100, even if the player shoots a game ball aiming at the right side far from the entrance of the game area (that is, the exit of the launch passage 401B), the game ball is left in the left game area. Can be made to flow down. Therefore, it is possible for the player to diversify the target position by the shooting operation, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if a shooting operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the right side in the game area, the right downflow passage 653 and the downflow restricting section 623 can return the game ball to the left side game area, so , Not only aiming the entry of the game ball into the passage opening 621 in the central structure 420 from the left side, but also letting a large number of the game balls flow down aiming at the entry into the passage opening 621 from the right side, the game ball is left side game area. The privilege related to the game can be given by being guided to. Also in this respect, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to enter the upper middle start winning device 632 on the condition that the game ball has entered the passage opening 621 in the central structure 420. In other words, the game ball does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 without entering the passage opening 621. Therefore, when a game ball is shot from the right side so as to aim at entering the passage opening 621, the game ball does not enter the passage opening 621 and the opportunity to enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 is lost. However, since the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the possibility of passing to the lower middle starting winning device 431 occurs. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the loss of the opportunity to enter the upper middle start winning device 632, and in that respect as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 100, the central structure 420 is provided above the lower middle start winning device 431 in the front view of the pachinko machine 100 (see FIG. 7 ). As a result, the roof 611B of the top plate decoration 611 is positioned so as to vertically overlap with the lower middle starting prize winning device 431, so that the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B have the flow-down restricting portion 623. By passing and moving to the left side, the lower middle start winning device 431 is reached through a substantially S-shaped moving path. Therefore, the player moves the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B to the lower middle starting prize winning device 431 different from the route that simply flows down, and therefore the player moves the moving route. Can be clearly conscious. As a result, even if the player shoots a game ball aiming at the side away from the left side game area (that is, the right side), the game ball may pass through the lower middle start winning device 431. Since the firing operation can be performed while clearly grasping, it is possible to suitably enjoy the game of performing the firing operation aiming at the right side.

Here, the first special symbol lottery based on the starting prize of the first special symbol, or the decorative symbol display device 479 that displays the decorative symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery based on the starting prize of the second special symbol. In a front view of the pachinko machine 100, the pachinko machine 100 is provided between the roof 611B and the lower middle start winning device 431. That is, the decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is displayed between the roof 611B and the lower middle starting winning device 431. Thereby, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the player can follow the movement route of the game ball, and if the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431, By raising upward from the position of the lower middle starting winning device 431, a decorative symbol according to the result of the lottery (that is, the first special symbol lottery) based on that the game ball has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431. Can be seen. After confirming the state of the decorative symbol display device 479, the player can further visually recognize how the game balls are distributed on the roof 611B located above the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being scattered around.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the game ball enters the passage opening 621 in the central structure 420, the game ball is guided to the stage 622C, and the upper middle start prize winning device 632 or the start prize winning device is caused by the stage 622C. Sorted out of 632. When the game ball has entered the passage opening 621 but is not distributed to the upper middle starting winning device 632, the game ball falls onto the flow-down regulation unit 623 and is discharged to the left side game area. Thereby, even if the player cannot enter the game ball into the upper middle starting prize device 632, the player may allow the game ball to enter the lower middle starting prize device 431 in the left game area. You can expect it to happen.

In particular, even if the game ball falls from the recess (recess 622D or recess 622F) that is on the right side with respect to the position of the upper middle start winning device 632 that reciprocates in the left-right direction, the game ball is moved to the left-side game area. Since the player can be guided, the player may have an unexpectedness with respect to the moving path of the game ball, and the game ball may move into the lower middle start winning device 431 with respect to the game ball moving along the unexpected path. You can have the hope that you will not.

In addition, in the conventional typical gaming machine, when the gaming ball that has entered the entry portion such as the passage opening 621 does not pass through the advantageous area such as the upper middle starting winning device 632, the gaming ball is a pachinko machine. It was discharged to the outside of 100. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the game ball that has entered the passage opening 621 does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Again, a chance to enter the lower middle starting winning device 431 is given. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the fact that the game ball that has entered the passage opening 621 has not entered the upper middle start winning device 632, and in that respect as well, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

<Behavior of the game ball according to the position of falling into the flow-down restricting section 623>
Next, with reference mainly to FIG. 17, the behavior of the game ball according to the falling position on the flow-down restricting portion 623 will be described. FIG. 17 is a front view of the partial cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 17, the general winning device 639 arranged in the left game area (that is, the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420) is also shown.

As described above, the game balls distributed to the left side or the right side by the roof 611B flow down the left downflow passage 652 or the right downflow passage 653, and then leftward on the inclined surface of the downflow regulating portion 623 (arrow Q3 direction: figure 16 (see 16) and is discharged to the left game area. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, in the flow-down restricting portion 623, the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface provided on the upper surface thereof is configured to be longer than the width of the roof 611B in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B (that is, when the game ball flows down the left downflow passage 652) and when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B (that is, the game ball is left). In the case of flowing down the flow-down passage 652), the position where the game ball falls onto the flow-down restricting portion 623 is different.

Specifically, when the game balls are distributed to the left side by the roof 611B, the side close to the exit 623A, which is the left end of the flow-down restricting portion 623, is the position where the game balls fall. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the right by the roof 611B, the side farther from the outlet 623A (that is, the side closer to the right end of the flow-down restricting portion 623) is the position where the game balls fall.

Since the inclined surface of the flow-down restricting portion 623 is configured to descend and incline from right to left, the height (vertical length) with respect to the position of the outlet 623A increases with increasing distance from the outlet 623A (that is, the left end of the inclined surface). Get higher Therefore, the farther the fall position of the game ball to the downflow regulation unit 623 from the position of the outlet 623A of the downflow regulation unit 623, the higher the height of the fall position with respect to the outlet 623A.

That is, the height of the falling position with respect to the exit 623A differs depending on the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B. For example, the game balls distributed to the right by the roof 611B fall to a higher position with respect to the exit 623A than when distributed to the left. Therefore, the acceleration mode of the game balls discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down restricting portion 623 can be made different according to the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B.

Specifically, when the game balls are distributed to the left side by the roof 611B and flow down the left downflow passage 652, the falling point to the downflow restriction unit 623 is on the side close to the exit 623A, and the height with respect to the exit 623A is relatively large. Low. Therefore, in such a case, the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A tends to have a relatively small acceleration. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B and flow down the right downflow passage 653, the falling point to the downflow restriction unit 623 is the side far from the exit 623A, and the height to the exit 623A is relatively large. high. Therefore, in such a case, the acceleration of the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A tends to be relatively large.

Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B, the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down restricting portion 623 easily takes the trajectory J1 that flows down on the side closer to the central structure 420. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the game balls discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down restricting portion 623 flow down on the side farther from the central structure 420 (that is, the side farther than the track J1). It is easy to take the trajectory J2.

The game ball discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down regulation unit 623 enters the left side game area. A general winning device 639 is arranged above the left game area (see FIG. 7). More specifically, the general winning device 639 is arranged at a position in the left-side game area near the exit 623A of the flow-down restricting portion 623, slightly to the left of the exit 623A.

By arranging the general winning device 639 at a position slightly to the left of the exit 623A, the possibility that the game ball discharged from the downflow restriction unit 623 may enter the general winning device 639 has passed through the track J2. In this case, it becomes higher than that when the track J1 is passed. Therefore, the farther the fall point to the flow-down restricting section 623 is from the exit 623A, the higher the possibility that the game ball will enter the general winning apparatus 639. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the possibility of entering the general winning device 639 is higher when the game balls are distributed to the right by the roof 611B.

Further, on the left side of the central structure 420, an opening 628</b>A serving as an inlet of the left warp passage 628 is provided. The game ball entered through the opening 628A passes through the left warp passage 628 formed inside the central structure 420 and enters the stage 625. As described above, the game ball that has entered the stage 625 rolls on the stage 625 and is distributed to any of the recesses 625A to 625C (see FIG. 16). At this time, when the game ball is distributed to the central recess 625A, the game ball enters the entrance 626 and is discharged from the discharge port 627.

Since the outlet 627 is located right above the lower middle starting winning device 431 (see FIG. 7), the game balls discharged from the outlet 627 enter the lower middle starting winning device 431 with high probability. That is, the game balls distributed to the recess 625A by the stage 625 easily enter the lower middle start winning device 431 located right below the discharge port 620. That is, when the game ball flowing down the left side game area enters the opening 628A, the game ball may enter the lower middle start winning device 431 with a high probability.

Since the opening 628A is provided on the left side of the central structure 420, the possibility that the game ball discharged from the flow-down restricting portion 623 enters the opening 628A is different from the case of the above-described general winning device 639. It becomes higher when the track J1 passing the side closer to the central structure 420 is passed than when the track J2 is passed. Therefore, the closer the drop point to the flow-down restricting portion 623 is from the exit 623A, the higher the possibility that the game ball will enter the opening 628A. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the possibility of entering the opening 628A is higher when the game balls are distributed to the left side by the roof 611B.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the action and effect relating to the behavior of the game ball according to the position where the game ball is dropped onto the flow-down restricting portion 623 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, the flow-down regulation unit 623 is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulation unit 623 to the left-side game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received. For example, the acceleration mode of the game balls discharged to the left side game area is different depending on whether the game balls are distributed to the right side or the left side by the roof 611B. On the other hand, the general winning device 639 is provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow-down restricting portion 623. The opening 628A serving as the entrance of the left warp passage 628 is also provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow-down restricting unit 623, like the general winning apparatus 639. Thereby, the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed according to the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulation unit 623.

Generally, the entry of the game ball into the advantageous area such as the general winning device 639 is easily determined by the arrangement of the downflow changing member such as a nail provided in the vicinity of the advantageous area, and the game ball at the position away from the advantageous area Behavior is less likely to affect entry into the advantage zone. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is hardly interested in the behavior of the game ball in a part of the game area, but in the pachinko machine 100, the game ball received by the flow-down restricting unit 623 as described above. Depending on the position of, the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed, so that the player can enjoy the game of moving the game ball in the flow-down regulation unit 623. It is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed depending on the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B, the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the general winning device 639 is arranged at a position slightly left of the outlet 623A of the flow-down restricting portion 623. In other words, the possibility of entering the general winning device 639 is higher when the game balls are distributed to the right by the roof 611B. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in launching the game ball aiming at a predetermined position such as a position to be distributed to the right side by the roof 611B.

Further, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B and a part of the game balls distributed by the stage 622C both pass through the flow-down restricting section 623. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B may pass the track J2, but may be blocked by the game ball distributed by the stage 622C. Since the timing at which the game balls are discharged from the stage 622C varies and is difficult to predict, even if the player aims at the progress of the game balls on the track J2, the progress of some of the game balls is discharged from the stage 622C. A situation occurs that is blocked by the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right side portion of the central upper game area from becoming extremely advantageous as compared with the left side portion.

<Functions of protrusions 612D and 613D>
Next, the functions of the protrusions 612D and 613D will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is a front view of the central structure 420. As shown in FIG. 18, an upper left front decoration 612 and an upper right front decoration 613 are provided on the left and right of the front side upper portion of the central structure 420.

In the upper left front decoration 612, the decoration main body 612A whose front side is visually recognized by the player is made of a light transmissive material whose surface is transparent or translucent. On the back side of the ornament main body 612A, a light-emitting body is provided as a board surface light-emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10), and by making the light-emitting body emit light, the light transmitted to the front side of the ornament main body 612A is transmitted to the game board 400. decorate. That is, the upper left front decoration 612 has a function as a decoration means for decorating the game board 400.

On the other hand, the decoration main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613 is also configured as a hollow body made of a light-transmissive material whose surface is transparent or translucent, like the decoration main body 612A. Therefore, like the upper left front decoration 612, the upper right front decoration 613 also functions as a decoration unit that decorates the game board 400.

In particular, the surfaces of the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A are configured such that the side facing the player (that is, the front side) is an undulation surface (decoration undulation surface). The decoration function is enhanced.

Similarly to the front surface, each back surface of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A is also made of a transparent or semitransparent and light-transmittable material. Therefore, when the player views the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613 from the front side, the player can visually recognize up to the back side thereof (that is, the back side of the back surfaces of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A).

As described above, since the flow-down passages 652 and 653 are provided on the back sides of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A (see FIGS. 15 and 16), the player can use the warp route via the decoration bodies 612A and 613A. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the flow-down passages 652 and 653 arranged in the central structure body 420. Therefore, the player can see through the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A how the game balls distributed to the right side or the left side by the roof 611B move on the warp route.

However, as described above, each of the front decorations 612 and 613 has a function as a decoration means and emits light when necessary, so that the light deteriorates the visibility of each back side of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A. It becomes difficult for the player to specify the positions of the downflow passages 652 and 653. Accordingly, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the whereabouts of the game balls sorted by the roof 611B. In particular, since the surfaces of the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulations, the emitted light is scattered on the undulations, and the visibility on the back side of each of the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A is significantly deteriorated.

On the other hand, on each back surface (more specifically, the back side of each back surface) of the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A, in each of the downflow passages 652 and 653, protrusions 612D and 613D extending in the continuous direction of the downflow passages 652 and 653. Are provided (see FIG. 15). Therefore, in the decoration bodies 612A and 613A, light is less likely to be transmitted through the portions where the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided, as compared with other portions. The decoration bodies 612A and 613A emit light by a light-emitting body provided on the back side thereof, and the thickness of the protrusions 612D and 613D in the front-rear direction is larger than that of the other portions, so that light is difficult to pass through. This is because the rear surface of the protrusions 612D and 613D is inclined in the front-rear direction, and thus it is difficult for light from the rear side to enter the inside of the protrusions 612D and 613D. Therefore, even when the front decorations 612 and 613 emit light, the player can visually recognize the portion where the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided as a darker portion than the other portions.

As described above, since the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D (the surfaces of the decoration body 612A and the back surface of the 613A that contact the back surfaces of the decoration bodies 612A) are formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652 and 653, the player is required to The dark portion is visually recognized as a line extending in the continuous direction of each of the downflow passages 652 and 653. Therefore, the player can specify the positions of the downflow passages 652 and 653 based on the dark portion. In this way, the protrusions 612D and 613D function as passage display means for displaying the downflow passages 652 and 653.

In particular, as described above, the surfaces of the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, and while enhancing the decorative effect by light, the visibility of each back side of the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A is deteriorated, but Is provided with the protrusions 612D and 613D that function as passage display means for displaying the flow-down passages 652 and 653, so that the warp route (formed on the back side is provided while performing a high degree of decorativeness that is entertaining to the player). Good visibility of the flow-down passages 652, 653) can be ensured.

In addition, since the plurality of protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652 and 653, the player can visually recognize a plurality of streaks as a dark portion and the flow-down. It is easy to identify the positions of the passages 652 and 653.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating the shape of the downflow passage. More specifically, FIG. 19 is a diagram in which the portion of the rightward flow passage 653 is extracted in the XA-XA arrow sectional view of FIG. 18. As shown in FIG. 19, the rightward flow passage 653 is configured as a meandering path by the protrusion 613D and the recess 653A formed on the surface facing the protrusion 613D.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the right-flowing passage 653 does not fall vertically, but flows down along a path meandering to the inner side of the central structure 420 (that is, the bottom side of the recess 652A). By causing the game ball to meander and flow down, the game ball collides with the right flow path 653 and flows down, whereby the flow speed of the game ball can be reduced. That is, the protrusion 613D has a function as a speed reduction unit. The leftward flow passage 652 is also configured as a meandering path similar to that in FIG. Therefore, the protrusion 612D also functions as a speed reducer similar to the protrusion 613D.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged view of the area E2 in FIG. The right downflow passage 653 has a passage width W1 in the left-right direction, that is, a separation distance between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C is set to a distance at which two game balls can pass at the same time. By adopting such a width, it is possible to suppress the ball clogging in the rightward flow passage 653.

On the other hand, in the right downflow passage 653, the width (length in the direction intersecting with the continuous direction of the right downflow passage 653) W2 of each section divided by the protrusion 613D is the diameter of the game ball (width of the game ball). It will be a smaller distance. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right-flowing passage 653 is rectified by the adjacent protrusion 613D. That is, the protrusion 613D has a function as a rectifying unit.

In this way, the flowing down game balls are rectified by the protrusion 613D, so even if the two game balls pass through the right downflow passage 653 almost at the same time, it is possible to suppress the ball clogging by the game balls. it can. The leftward flow passage 652 is also configured similarly to FIG. Therefore, the protrusion 612D also functions as a rectifying unit similar to the protrusion 613D.

Next, the operation and effect of disposing the protrusions 612D and 613D in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, since the projections 612D and 613D functioning as passage display means are provided on the respective back surfaces of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A, the decoration bodies 612A and 613A decorate the game board 400 by light emission. Even if so, it is easy to understand the existence of the left and right flow-down passages 652, 653 before the start of the game (that is, before the game ball enters the left side game area including the lower middle start winning device 431). Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust or irritation with respect to the game ball that has entered the game ball passage, the player can enjoy the game started by entering the game ball into the game ball passage. You can As a result, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Further, the left and right downflow passages 652 and 653 are passages through which the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof 611B respectively pass, and the downflow restricting portions 623 are provided on the respective downstream sides of the downflow passages 652 and 653, The game ball that has passed through the flow-down passages 652, 653 rolls on the flow-down restriction portion 623 and is discharged to the left-side game area. At this time, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B pass through the right downflow passage 653, and then roll from the side close to the right end of the downflow restriction unit 623 to the exit 623A. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the game balls pass through a relatively long route before entering the left side game area. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, it is easy to understand the existence of the rightward flow passage 653 before starting the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel distrust of the game ball entering the relatively long path. Can be suitably suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 100, the protrusions 612D and 613D function as speed reducing means in the meandering portion formed together with the recess 652A, while the protrusions 612D and 613D function as rectifying means, so that the game in the meandering portion is performed. The clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

<Stages 622C and 625>
Next, the two stages 622C and 625 provided in the central structure 420 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating the upper and lower stages 622C and 625. More specifically, FIG. 21 is a front view of the game board 400 with a part of the configuration omitted.

Note that, in FIG. 21, the shape of each rolling surface of the stages 622C and 625 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine is particularly indicated by a thick line. In addition, in FIG. 21, the positions of the flow-down restricting portion 623 and the left warp passage 628 are shown by broken lines, and the above-described orbits J1 and J2 that can be taken by the game balls discharged from the flow-down restricting portion 623 are also illustrated.

The stage 622C is provided above the decorative pattern display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine. On the stage 622C, the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls is formed in a wavy streamline shape that extends in the left-right direction in a front view of the gaming machine. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage 622C is mainly configured to include an uneven surface including a convex surface that is convex upward near the center and a concave surface that is concave downward to the left and right of the convex surface. It The uneven surface is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the approximate center of the convex surface. The left and right ends of the rolling surface of the stage 622C are located above the top of the convex surface. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the stage 622C is reciprocated left and right.

The stage 625 is provided below the decorative pattern display device 479 in a front view of the gaming machine. That is, the stage 622C and the stage 625 are arranged vertically with the decorative pattern display device 479 interposed therebetween.

The rolling surface on which the game ball rolls in the lower stage 625 has a wavy streamline shape extending in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine, as in the case of the stage 622C. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage 625 is mainly configured to include an uneven surface including a convex surface that is convex upward near the center and a concave surface that is concave downward to the left and right of the convex surface. It The uneven surface is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the approximate center of the convex surface. The left and right ends of the rolling surface of the stage 625 are located above the top of the convex surface. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the stage 625 reciprocates left and right.

Each of the rolling surfaces of the stages 622C and 625 is mainly configured to include an uneven surface composed of a convex surface and concave surfaces formed on the left and right sides thereof, so that the game balls that have entered the stages 622C and 625 are both , Rolls left and right on each rolling surface while going up and down in a front view of the game machine along a smooth track along the convex surface and the concave surface. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the upper stage 622C and the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the lower stage 625 are the same. Are similar to each other.

A concave portion 622D (see FIG. 14) is provided at the top of the convex surface of the rolling surface of the upper stage 622C. On the other hand, a recess 622E (see FIG. 14) is provided on the bottom of the left concave surface. A recess 622F (see FIG. 14) is provided on the bottom of the right concave surface.

These recesses 622D, 622E, 622F are all shaped to incline downward toward the front (the front side of the gaming machine), whereby the game balls that have entered the stage 622C have three recesses 622D, 622E. , 622F, the game ball is guided forward along each of the recesses 622D, 622E, 622F and falls from the front of the stage 622C.

As described above, the upper middle starting prize device 632 provided in front of the stage 622C is configured to be capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the front of the stage 622C via any of the recesses 622D, 622E, 622F, the upper middle start winning device 632, provided that the upper middle starting winning device 632 is in an appropriate position at the drop timing. Enter 632.

On the other hand, a concave portion 625A (see FIG. 16) is provided at the top of the convex surface of the rolling surface of the lower stage 625. On the other hand, a recess 625B (see FIG. 16) is provided at the bottom of the left concave surface. A recess 625C (see FIG. 16) is provided at the bottom of the right concave surface.

Of these recesses 625A, 625B, 625C, the left and right recesses 625B, 625C are shaped to incline downward toward the front (the front side of the gaming machine), so that the game ball that has entered the stage 625 is When distributed to the recesses 625B and 625C, the game balls are guided forward along the recesses 625B and 625C and fall from the front of the stage 625.

On the other hand, the central recessed portion 625A is shaped to incline downward toward the rear (the back side of the gaming machine), and the game balls distributed to the recessed portion 624A are guided rearward to the rear surface side of the recessed portion 624A. Enters the entrance 626 that is connected to the end of the. The game ball that has entered the entrance 626 is discharged from the discharge opening 627 located on the upstream side of the lower middle starting prize winning apparatus 431.

The game balls distributed to the recesses 625A on the stage 625 enter the lower middle start winning device 431 located on the downstream side of the discharge port 620 with a high probability. On the other hand, the other recesses (that is, the recesses 625B and 625C) are positioned laterally offset with respect to the lower middle starting prize winning device 431, so that the game balls distributed to these recesses 625B and 625C are lower. It is difficult to enter the side-center start winning device 431.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the operation and effect related to the shapes of the stages 622C and 625 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, two stages 622C and 625 capable of allocating game balls to the upper middle starting winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431 are provided. As a result, the player can enjoy the amusement of sorting by the stage 622C or the stage 625 with respect to both the upper middle starting winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431, and thus, the interest of the game is preferably improved. It becomes possible.

In particular, since these stages 622C and 625 have rolling surfaces configured in a similar shape with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, the rolling behavior of the gaming ball on the rolling surface is in both stages. It becomes similar in 622C and 625. As a result, the player can similarly enjoy the distribution of the game balls by each of the stages 622C and 625 in a visually similar manner.

Each of the stage 622C and the stage 625 is formed in a wavy streamline shape whose rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in a front view of the gaming machine. The stage 622C and the stage 625 having such a shape are provided above and below via the decorative symbol display device 479 formed substantially in the center of the game area, so that the game ball flows down in the horizontal direction of the decorative symbol display device 479. It is possible to secure a game area with a suitable size.

At this time, since the left warp passage 628 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 479, the game ball flowing down the left game area passes through the left warp passage 628, and thus the decorative symbol display device 479. Is guided to a stage 625 provided below. Therefore, the game area around the decorative symbol display device 479 can be effectively utilized.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the game ball does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 as a result of the distribution by the stage 622C, in that case, the game ball passes through the flow-down restriction unit 623, so that the left game Emitted to the area. At this time, for example, when the game ball discharged from the flow-down restricting portion 623 flows down on the track J1 that flows down on the side closer to the track J2 with respect to the central structure 420, the game ball is left warp passage 628. There is a possibility that the vehicle will be guided to the stage 625.

In this way, as a result of the distribution by the stage 622C, even if the game ball does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, since there is a route for guiding the game ball to the stage 625, the player has a lower side. The chance to enter the middle start winning device 431 (the chance to make the first special symbol lottery) is given again. Therefore, the game balls sorted by the stage 622C do not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, and it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the second special symbol lottery has not been made.

Further, when the game balls sorted by the stage 622C are sorted again on the stage 625, the rolling behaviors on both the stages 622C and 625 are similar to each other, so that the player is In 625, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the distribution similar to the distribution by the stage 622C, which has a possibility of obtaining the special symbol lottery, is performed. Therefore, also in that respect, it is possible to make the player feel that a second chance for the special symbol lottery (more specifically, the first special symbol lottery) has been obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 are configured such that the rolling surfaces are similar in shape to the rolling behavior of the game ball, while the recesses 622D and 625A formed in the middle are formed. (See FIG. 16), but the discharge directions of the game balls are formed in different shapes. Thereby, the difference between the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 can be distinguished by the difference in the discharge direction of the game balls discharged from the recesses 622D and 625A. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the lower middle starting winning device 431 is fixedly provided, while the upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured to be capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction. Therefore, the probability that the game balls sorted by the upper stage 622C enter the upper middle starting prize device 632 is higher than the probability that the gaming balls sorted by the lower stage 625 enter the lower middle starting prize device 431. Will be lower. In this respect as well, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt because the rolling behavior of the game ball is similar between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the upper middle starting prize winning device 632, the value is higher than that when the game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431 (game. You can expect to gain value. That is, the expected value is different when the game ball enters the upper middle starting prize device 632 and when the game ball enters the lower middle starting prize device 431. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to avoid the monotonous game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

<Movable body 710>
Next, the movable body 710 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400. As shown in FIG. 22, a housing case 701 is arranged on the back surface of the base 401. The accommodation case 701 accommodates various devices for display such as a decorative symbol display device 479 and a movable body 710 described later. In addition, the housing case 701 is formed with a collecting and discharging passage for collecting the game balls discharged from the game area.

The movable body 710 is arranged closer to the central structure 420 than the decorative pattern display device 479 in the housing case 700. That is, the movable body 710 is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 497 and the central structure 420. The movable body 710 is connected to a movable body drive device 721 (see FIG. 10) including a motor and the like. The movable body driving device 721 operates under the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), whereby the movable body 710 operates in the up-down direction in the gaming machine front view.

The movable body 710 has a predetermined position below the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine as an initial position (see FIG. 24). That is, the movable body 710 at the initial position does not overlap the decorative pattern display device 479. Then, when various operating conditions described later are satisfied, the movable body 710 is moved to each position above the initial position. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the movable body 710 at a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

FIG. 23 is a front view of the movable body 710. In the present embodiment, the movable body 710 is configured to have the appearance of a whale character, but various shapes can be adopted as the appearance. The movable body 710 is mainly composed of a main body 711 and a decorative symbol display device 779 provided on the front side of the gaming machine in the main body 711. The decorative symbol display device 779 is configured by arranging a plurality of circular light emitting portions 779A in the left-right direction in a front view of the gaming machine.

Each light-emitting unit 779A contains a light-emitting body such as an LED, and by individually controlling the light-emission of each light-emitting unit, the plurality of light-emitting units 779A can be individually turned on. Of the plurality of light emitting units 779A, the central light emitting unit 779A is larger than the other light emitting units 779A, and is brilliantly decorated. On the surface of the central light emitting portion 779A, a character 779B of "win" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit is fixedly formed.

The decorative symbol display device 779 is a unit game relating to the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting prize device 632, or the entry of the game ball into the lower middle starting prize device 431 under predetermined conditions. Or, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 432, it is a device for performing variable display and confirmation display.

Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 779 has a predetermined lighting pattern for the plurality of light emitting units 779A (for example, a lighting pattern for moving the light emitting units 779A that emit light one by one from left to right, or a predetermined lighting unit for all the light emitting units 779A. By changing the lighting pattern according to the rhythm of (1), the variable display is performed.

Then, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display, the stop display is performed by turning on the central light emitting unit 779A, and the confirmed display showing the big hit is performed. Since the character 779B is formed on the surface of the central light emitting portion 779A, the player has decided that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery was a big hit against the stop display at the central light emitting portion 779A. recognize. On the other hand, in other cases, the stop display is performed by turning on the light emitting portion 779A other than the center, and the confirmation display indicating that the jackpot is not a big hit is performed.

The lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units 779A may be changed according to the expectation of a big hit. For example, compared with a lighting pattern in which all the light emitting units 779A are turned on in accordance with a predetermined rhythm (for example, 3, 3, and 7 beats), a light emitting unit 779A that emits light is moved one by one from left to right. The lighting pattern may have a high expectation. Further, the specific lighting pattern may be one that indicates confirmation of a big hit.

24 to 27 are diagrams showing the case where the movable body 710 is arranged at various positions. 24 to 27, a part of the game board 400, more specifically, a peripheral area of the decorative symbol display device 479 is extracted and displayed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position. The movable body 710 is normally arranged at the initial position shown in FIG. Specifically, the initial position is a position where the movable body 710 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine. Since most of the stage back cover 615 of the central structure 420 is transparent (light-transmitting), a part of the movable body 710 placed in the initial position is visually recognized through the stage back cover 615. it can.

An enlarged view of the region E3 is shown in the lower part of FIG. When the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, when a passage that is connected to the discharge port 627 and extends in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is viewed from the discharge port 627 and is visually recognized, the central light emitting unit in the decorative symbol display device 779. A part of the character “779” (see FIG. 23) formed on 779A is visually recognized. That is, since the outlet 627 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, the passage connected to the outlet 627 is transparent, and the periphery of the outlet 627 is opaque (light opaque), the player When the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, a part of the character “79” of “NO” is visually recognized through the outlet 627, instead of the whole.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position. The movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position shown in FIG. 25 when performing the variable display and the confirmation display by the decorative symbol display device 779. The variable display position is a position where the movable body 710 overlaps with most of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the gaming machine front view, and the decorative symbol display device 779 is exposed above the stage back cover 615. The variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779 is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 or the entry of the game ball into the right starting prize winning device 432 under predetermined conditions.

The operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled at the timing of starting the variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward (that is, rises) from the initial position and is arranged at the variable display position. At this time, the moving pattern of the movable body 710 that moves up to the variable display position may be changed according to the expectation of a big hit. For example, the movement pattern in which the movable body 710 moves up and down while swinging to the left and right may be a movement pattern having a higher degree of expectation than the movement pattern in which the movable body 710 linearly rises.

The movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position is in a game state at that time, such as an initial position or an intermediate position described later, at a predetermined timing for releasing the arrangement after execution of the finalized display by the decorative pattern display device 779. It is moved to the corresponding position.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position. The intermediate position is a position between the initial position (see FIG. 24) and the variable display position (see FIG. 25). Therefore, the region where the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 479 is smaller than the region where the movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 479.

When the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 is generated, the operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward from the initial position and is arranged at the intermediate position. In the present embodiment, when the contact sensor 662 (see FIG. 10) provided on the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B of the distribution device 622 detects passage of the game ball, It is assumed that there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632.

The movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position is moved to the intermediate position, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the movable body 710 is moved to the intermediate position at a predetermined timing to release the arrangement, such as an initial position or a variable display position. It is moved to a position according to the game state at that time.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position. The movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position shown in FIG. 27 when the game ball enters the lower stage 625. The irradiation position is a position where the decorative pattern display device 779 of the movable body 710 can illuminate the rolling surface of the stage 625. The plurality of light emitting units 779A in the decorative symbol display device 779 are arranged substantially along the shape of the rolling surface of the stage 625 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, by disposing the movable body 710 at the irradiation position, the stage 625 The rolling surface of can be suitably illuminated.

When the game balls are distributed by the stage 625, the operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward from the initial position and is arranged at the irradiation position. In the present embodiment, when the contact sensor 665 (see FIG. 10) provided on the passage near the exit of the left warp passage 628 detects the passage of the game ball, the stage 625 distributes the game ball. I will be told.

The movable body 710 arranged at the irradiation position is a position corresponding to the game state at that time, such as an initial position or a variable display position, at a predetermined timing to release the arrangement such as when the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 is completed. Be moved to.

An enlarged view of the area E4 is shown in the lower part of FIG. When the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position, when a passage which is connected to the entrance 626 and extends in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is viewed from the entrance 626 and viewed, the central light-emitting portion in the decorative symbol display device 779. A part of the character “779” (see FIG. 23) formed on 779A is visually recognized.

That is, the entrance 626 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, the passage connected to the entrance 626 is configured to be transparent, and the area 615A (hatched hatching) formed around the entrance 626 in the stage back cover 615 is formed. Since the region (shown by) is configured to be opaque, when the movable body 710 is placed in the irradiation position, the player does not use the entire “character” 779B, not the entire character, through the outlet 627. Part of it will be visible. Particularly, in the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes the upper portion of the character “779” of “A” as if it is a downward arrow (that is, “↓”) through the entrance 626. Become.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the operation and effect of the operation of the movable body 710 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 710 moves upward from the initial position (see FIG. 24) when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs. The occurrence of the approach possibility can be recognized from the moving direction of 710 (in the present embodiment, from above).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632, so that the player can get a chance to obtain a large game value. However, the upper middle start winning device 632 is set to have a lower probability that the game ball will enter than the lower middle starting prize device 431. Therefore, the player's line of sight is that the lower middle starting prize is easy for the game ball to enter. A situation occurs in which the player tends to face the device 431 and the player easily misses the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632. Particularly, since the decorative symbol display device 479 is interposed between the upper middle starting winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431, the player's consciousness for the upper middle starting winning device 632 having a low probability of entering is It becomes easier to fade.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can recognize the occurrence of the approach possibility from the moving direction of the movable body 710, so that the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632. (That is, the player can be prevented from missing the start condition for the second special symbol lottery). That is, it is possible for the player to easily witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632. As a result, it is possible to preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632.

Further, when the game ball enters the upper middle starting prize device 632, it is possible to expect a higher value (game value) than when the game ball enters the lower middle starting prize device 431, so that point. Also in the above, by facilitating the passage of the game ball to the upper middle starting prize device 632, it is possible to preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle starting prize device 632.

The movable body 710 provided with the decorative pattern display device 779 is diverted as a component indicating that the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 has been diverted, so it is dedicated for suggesting it. Since it is not necessary to provide the above parts, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Moreover, the moving direction of the movable body 710 when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, the movable body 710 is the second special symbol from the initial position by using the decorative symbol display device 779. Since it is the direction toward the position for performing the variable display and the finalized display of the unit game according to (that is, the variable display position shown in FIG. 25), the player moves the movable body 710 upward, and the second special symbol lottery. It can be intuitively recognized that it is related to the establishment of the starting condition for (that is, the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632).

In particular, since the moving direction of the movable body 710 in such a case is the side on which the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 is located (that is, the upper side), the upper middle starting winning prize device is matched with the movement of the movable body 710 to the player's line of sight. It can be naturally directed to 632. Thereby, the player can witness the entrance of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632 with a suitable probability.

Further, when the contact sensor 662 detects a game ball passing through the left distribution passage 622A or the right distribution passage 622B of the distribution device 622, the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs. Since the movable body 710 is moved, the player should pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the stage 622C (sorting device 622) related to whether or not the game balls pass through the upper middle start winning device 632. You can This allows the player to enjoy the game in which the game balls are distributed by the stage 622C.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs, the movable body 710 is positioned at an intermediate position (see FIG. 26) different from the variable display position, so that the movable body 710 is movable. Depending on the position of the body 710, the movement of the movable body 710 is performed based on the occurrence of the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 or the variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779. It is possible for the player to distinguish whether or not it has been broken. Therefore, the player can suitably recognize the occurrence of the possibility of entry.

This intermediate position is a position where the movable body 710 overlaps in front of the decorative symbol display device 479, which is one of the positions where the player can easily pay attention, so that the player is in a position overlapping the decorative symbol display device 479. It is easy to recognize the moving movable body 710, and accordingly, it is possible to preferably recognize that the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 has occurred.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the game balls are distributed by the stage 625, the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position (see FIG. 27), and the light emitting unit 779A of the decorative pattern display device 779 is caused to emit light, thereby the stage The rolling surface of 625 is illuminated. Therefore, the game balls to be sorted by the stage 625 roll on the rolling surface illuminated by the light emitting unit 779A.

Since the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 is related to the establishment of the starting condition for the first special symbol lottery (that is, the entry of the game balls into the lower middle starting prize winning device 431), the player is the lower middle starting prize winning device. Paying attention to the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 while expecting the game balls to enter the space 431. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the light emitting unit 779A, the light illuminating the rolling surface causes the player to expect the game ball to enter the lower middle start winning device 431. Function as. As a result, the player's expectation is fueled, and the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the stage 625 can be suitably improved.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the operation and effect of the decorative pattern display device 779 arranged on the movable body 710 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, the variable display of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the confirmation display (the stop display showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery) are the decorative symbol display devices 779 arranged on the movable body 710. Since it is displayed using, the variable display and the confirmation display of the unit game relating to the special symbol are more interesting to the player than the conventional typical gaming machine displayed on the screen such as the decorative symbol display device 479. Can be given.

In addition, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position or the irradiation position, the player visually recognizes not a whole of the letter “79” of “A” but a part thereof through the discharge port 627 or the entrance 626. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at these positions, the player is the character 779B formed on the surface of the central light emitting unit 779A, and the original lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. It is difficult to recognize that it is the character of "this" that indicates that there is.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the movable body 710 has the variable display position such as the initial position and the irradiation position (that is, the variation of the unit game related to the second special symbol using the decorative symbol display device 779). The character 779B visually recognized through the outlet 627 or the entrance 626 is visually recognized as a content that does not indicate that it is a big hit. Although the decorative symbol display device 779 is not in the situation of displaying the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a big hit has been obtained by looking at the decorative symbol display device 779. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged unnecessarily due to the mistaken recognition of the lottery result, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to such false recognition.

Visually recognizing the character 779B as a content that does not indicate a big hit is a relatively simple configuration in which the character 779B is visually recognized through the discharge port 627 or the entrance 626 rather than being controlled to be a different character. Can be achieved with. In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to visually recognize the character 779B as a content that does not indicate a big hit, on the front side of the gaming machine, which is connected to the passage of the gaming ball, such as the outlet 627 and the entrance 626. Since the opening is used, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated opening (window portion), and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the entrance 626 and the exit 627 are the entrance and the exit of the passage for discharging the game ball rolling on the stage 625 to the upstream side of the lower middle starting prize winning apparatus 431, so the entrance 626 or the exit. Although the character 799B visually recognized from 627 is visually recognized as a content that does not indicate a big hit, a part of the character 799B is visually recognized from the entrance 626 or the outlet 627, and thus the entrance 626 or the outlet. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the superiority of the game ball passing through 627.

In particular, when the movable body 710 is in the irradiation position, the character 779B, a part of which is visually recognized through the entrance 626, is visually recognized as if it is a downward arrow (that is, “↓”). The player can associate the entrance 626 with the lower middle start winning device 431 located below the entrance 626. Therefore, with respect to the game ball that has entered the entrance 626, it is possible to make the player have a great expectation regarding the right of the first special symbol lottery.

<Change in display position of decorative pattern according to position of movable body 710>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27 again, a change in the display position of the decorative symbol according to the position of the movable body 710 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, three symbol columns of left, middle and right are displayed as the decorative symbol Z. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (for example, numbers). The decorative symbol Z is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 by scrolling these symbols for each symbol column, for example.

The decorative symbol Z may be composed of three or more columns of symbols, and the direction in which the symbol columns are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction. Further, the symbols in each symbol row are not limited to numbers, and may be, for example, a card form in which numbers are drawn or a character. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the mode in which the symbol is scrolled for each symbol row, and for example, the symbol is rotated in and out on the spot, and the content of the symbol is switched every time the front and back are switched by the rotation. It may be.

As shown in FIG. 24, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position is located below the decorative symbol display device 479 and does not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the variable display or the confirmation display by the decorative symbol Z is displayed in the default size (maximum size) at the substantially central default position in the decorative symbol display device 479.

As shown in FIG. 27, the irradiation position of the movable body 710 is such that the movable body 710 arranged at the irradiation position overlaps the decorative pattern Z displayed at the default position in the decorative pattern display device 479 with the default size. It is a position that does not become. That is, also when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the variable display or the confirmation display by the decorative symbol Z is displayed at the default position in the decorative symbol display device 479 with the default size.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, since the movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position overlaps most of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine, the decorative symbol display device 479 is exposed to the player. The area to do is limited. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position, the reduced size decorative pattern Z is displayed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)). In the exposed area (in the example shown in FIG. 25, the upper right area). Accordingly, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position, it is possible to prevent the fixed display of the decorative pattern Z from being hidden by the movable body 710 and becoming invisible.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position, the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 479 is exposed, but the movable body 710 overlaps the lower side. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position, the reduced size decorative pattern Z is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)). It is displayed in the exposed area left on the upper side. Therefore, for example, when the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves to the intermediate position, the decorative pattern Z also moves upward with the movement.

As described above, the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs. Therefore, since the decorative pattern Z moves upward in response to the movable body 710 being arranged at the intermediate position, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the upper middle starting prize device 632 located above.

For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol Z in the unit game relating to the first special symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, depending on the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting prize device 632, Thus, the variable display being executed is continued by the reduced size decorative pattern Z at the upper position in the decorative pattern display device 479. That is, in such a case, the variable display by the reduced size decorative pattern Z is performed at the upper position in the decorative pattern display device 479. In the state where the variable display by the decorative symbol display device 479 or the decorative symbol display device 779 is not executed (so-called customer waiting state), when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting prize device 632 occurs Alternatively, the reduced size decorative pattern Z may be displayed at a position above the decorative pattern display device 479.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position, control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)) is provided above the decorative symbol display device 479. ), arrows 731 and 732 pointing upward are displayed together with the decorative pattern Z. As a result, the player's attention to the upper middle starting winning device 632 can be further increased.

Further, by pointing the arrows 731 and 732 upward, the player can be made aware that the decorative pattern Z is moving upward. In that respect as well, the player's attention to the upper middle starting winning device 632 can be further increased. In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the left arrow 731 points to the upper right, the right arrow 732 points to the upper left, and the attention degree to the decorative pattern Z displayed between these arrows 731 and 732 is more preferable. Is raised to.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the operation and effect relating to the change in the display position of the decorative pattern according to the position of the movable body 710 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs, the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 moves upward, so that the player can use the decorative symbol Z. It is possible to recognize the occurrence of the approach possibility from the movement of the vehicle and the moving direction thereof. Therefore, the player can be prevented from overlooking the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632 (that is, the player fulfilling the starting condition for the second special symbol lottery). That is, it is possible for the player to easily witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632. As a result, it is possible to preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632.

In addition, the upper middle starting prize winning device 632, which is set to have a lower probability of entering the game ball than the lower middle starting winning device 431, is a portion where the player easily misses the entrance of the game ball. In addition, by moving the decorative symbol Z, it is possible to cause the player to witness the entrance of the game ball into the upper middle starting prize device 632 with a suitable probability, so that the game ball that enters the upper middle starting prize device 632 can be entered. The interest of can be improved more suitably.

In particular, since the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 indicates the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, it is one of the places where the player most easily tilts his or her consciousness. Therefore, since the player can catch the movement of the decorative symbol Z with high probability, by moving the decorative symbol Z, it is more preferable that the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 has occurred. Can be recognized by the player.

Further, the occurrence of the possibility of entering the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632 is suggested to the player by using the decorative symbol Z indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, and thus the second special symbol lottery. Providing the player with an expectation for the entry of the game ball into the related starting winning device (upper middle starting winning device 632) and the expectation for the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery that is not related to the second special symbol lottery. You can

Further, since the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z is the side on which the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located (that is, the upper side), the player's line of sight is aligned with the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z to the upper middle starting winning device 632. And can be directed to nature. Thereby, the player can witness the entrance of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632 with a suitable probability.

Since the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 has occurred, when the decorative design Z is displayed on the decorative design display device 479, the reduced size decorative design Z is displayed, so the decorative design display device 479. A large area can be secured on the lower side as a region where the decorative pattern Z is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs, not only the decorative symbol Z is moved upward, but also the movable body 710 is in the intermediate position as described above. Since the player is moved, the player's consciousness can be more strongly directed to the upper side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is arranged. This allows the player to more appropriately recognize that the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 has occurred.

<Game state transition control>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, an example of game state transition control in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention will be described in more detail. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between the special symbol lottery content and the transitioning game state.

The transition control of the game state is performed by the control of the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10), and the numerical data and control programs related to the transition of each game state such as the winning probability and the distribution probability are stored in the ROM of the main control board 920. Remembered in. The main control board 920 generates a normal gaming state, a special gaming state, and a time saving gaming state as the gaming states of the pachinko machine 100. The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is executed upon the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol, and when the jackpot lottery is won in the normal gaming state, the special game state is passed to save time. It becomes a state or returns to the normal game state.

In the pachinko machine 100, as a lottery related to the special symbol, a lottery related to the first special symbol and a lottery related to the second special symbol are executed. As shown in FIG. 28, the lottery related to the special symbol is executed according to the same winning probability (approximately 1/23) regardless of the symbol type, and the winning random number counter can take a value (for example, "0 to 0. The winning value (for example, "0-2859") is set in advance for 65535"), and the winning probability of the big hit is determined by the ratio of this range and the winning value.

When the big hit lottery related to the special symbol is won, as shown in FIG. 28, one big hit type is selected from the big hit types which are set to a total of seven kinds of the first big hit 1 to 5 and the second big hit 1 and 2. To be done. The jackpot type is determined for each special symbol type, and the selection of the jackpot type when the lottery related to each special symbol is won is executed according to predetermined selection conditions, specifically, it is acquired based on the start winning. It is selected according to the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter.

As shown in FIG. 28, five types of first jackpots 1 to 5 are set as the jackpot types related to the first special symbol. The first jackpot 1 to 5 is selected by lottery using the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter so as to follow a predetermined distribution probability. As the distribution probabilities, for example, the first big hit 1 is “18.85%”, the first big hit 2 is “4.15%”, the first big hit 3 is “0.05%”, and the first big hit 4 is "51.30%" and the first jackpot 5 are set to "25.65%".

As a special game state that occurs when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, two types of special game states with different average number of balls that can be obtained (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of obtained balls) are set. The special game state in which the number of acquired balls is small is configured by a plurality of rounds (4 times), and in each round, the winning opening is opened by taking the entry allowable posture in which the central big winning device 434 is operated for a short time, and the game ball However, the opening (short opening) for a short time (approximately 0.05 seconds) at which almost no entry can be made will be set as the end of one round, and the player will move to the entry prohibited posture, and the winning opening will be closed. Therefore, even if the round of short opening is repeated a plurality of times, the game ball does not enter the central big winning device 434, and the number of balls that have shot the game ball is consumed in the special game state.

The special game state in which the number of balls to be acquired is large is constituted by a plurality of rounds (three times), and in each round, the central winning device 434 takes the entry permitting posture for a longer time than the round in the special game state of short opening. The prize hole is opened. In the special game state of long opening, the winning opening of the central winning apparatus 434 is opened to start the round, and a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has passed or a predetermined number (for example, When eight (8) game balls are detected by the big winning switch 443, one round ends and the player moves to the entry prohibited posture and the winning opening is closed. Therefore, when the long open round is repeated a plurality of times, the game balls enter the central winning device 434 in proportion to the number of rounds, and the player has a substantially constant number of balls (147) in the special game state. Individual game balls.

If you win the lottery related to the first special symbol, after the special game state, if the time saving game state occurs, and if the time saving game state does not occur (that is, if the time saving number is 0 times) is set Has been done. Also, whether or not the time saving game state occurs and the number of times saving time corresponds to the game state in which it is determined whether to generate the time saving game state, and when the jackpot is won in the non-time saving state, the jackpot is increased in the time saving state. The condition when the winning situation is more likely to occur in the case of winning is set.

Specifically, when the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is won and the first jackpot 1,4 is selected, the number of time saving is set to "0 times", and the special game state The normal game state is started later. If you win the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state and the first big hit 2, 3, 5 is selected, transition to the time saving game state, and if the first big hit 2, 5 as the number of time saving "1 time", in the case of the first jackpot 3 "87 times" transition to the time saving game state. The number of times saved is the maximum number of times the lottery related to the special symbol is continuously executed in the time saving game state transitioned after the special game state, and the upper limit that can be unwinned in succession to the lottery related to the special symbol It matches the number of times. Until the number of times saved is reached, when the lottery related to the special symbol is continuously unwinned, the time saving game state ends, and the game returns to the normal game state. As an average value of the number of time saving added when the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is won, the total of the values obtained by multiplying the distribution probability in each first jackpot and the number of time saving in the non-time saving state Can be represented by, and is approximately 0.34 times.

In the case of winning the lottery related to the first special symbol in the time saving state, it is easier to select a longer time saving number than in the case of winning the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state. Even if it is selected, the number of shortening times is set to "87 times". Even as an average value of the number of times saved in the case of winning the lottery related to the first special symbol in the hour saved state, it is represented by the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the distribution probability in each first big hit and the number of times saved in the hour reduced state. It is possible to do it 87 times.

When roughly classified by the number of times saved and shortened as the ratio of the big hit type related to the first special symbol, the distribution ratio of the first big hit 1,4 corresponding to "0 times" is "18.85%" and "51.30%". "70.15%" to which "1" was added, and the distribution ratio of the first big 2,5 corresponding to "1 time" was "29.8%" to which "4.15%" and "25.65%" were added. , And the distribution ratio of the first big 3 corresponding to “87 times” is “0.05%”. Therefore, when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, "0 times" is selected and the transition to the time-saving gaming state is the most often occupying about 70%, and about 1% at a lower probability of about 30%. A short time gaming state occurs, and "87 times" is a special advantageous gaming state that rarely occurs.

The special game state that occurs when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won is set to be more advantageous to the player than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. As shown in FIG. 28, two types of second jackpots 1 and 2 are set as the jackpot type according to the second special symbol, and the 2nd jackpots 1 and 2 follow the predetermined distribution probability, and the jackpot symbol. It is selected by lottery using the value of the random number counter. As the distribution probabilities, the second big hit 1 is set to “75.00%” and the second big hit 2 is set to “25.00%”.

As the special game state that occurs when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, two types of special game states in which the number of balls that can be acquired (the number of acquired balls) are different are set. Each special game state is configured by a plurality of rounds with different numbers of times, and in each round, the central big winning device 434 takes a long open entry allowing posture in which a certain number of game balls can enter, and the winning opening is opened. It The number of long open rounds is set to multiple times of 5 rounds (5R) and 3 rounds (3R). In the case of 5 rounds, "245 pieces" and in the case of 3 rounds, "147 pieces" It is set to the number of balls acquired. Each round constituting the long open special game state according to the second special symbol is set to the same opening and closing conditions as the round constituting the long open special game state according to the first special symbol, and common control is performed. It is used. Further, the special game state of the long open of three rounds related to the second special symbol is set to the same number of rounds as the special game state of the long open related to the first special symbol, and the same control can be used. ..

If the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, after the special game state, the condition for transitioning to the time saving game state is also set to be advantageous by the player as compared to the case where the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. ing. Specifically, if you win the lottery related to the second special symbol, regardless of whether it is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state, it is set to transition to the time saving game state, and the lottery related to the special symbol The probability of transitioning to the time saving game state when winning is set to a high probability.

Also regarding the number of hours saved, when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, the player is set to be more advantageous than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. Specifically, when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, the number of times saved and the average value thereof are set to "87 times", and the number of continuations is greater than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. The time saving game state is set to be easily selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, game state progression control will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the progress control of the game state. Here, in FIG. 29, the establishment of the main conditions in each gaming state and the control of the device executed when the conditions are fulfilled are schematically shown, and the gaming method necessary for the player in each gaming state is shown. It is also shown.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the normal gaming state is set. In the normal game state, the game is performed by the left-handed game technique, and the game ball enters the lower middle starting prize device 431 or the upper middle starting prize device 632 related to the second special symbol, which relates to the special symbol. The starting prize is generated and the big hit lottery is held.

When the game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431, the starting winning of the first special symbol (first starting winning) becomes, the right of the unit game occurs and the lottery related to the first special symbol is performed. , The variable display that is fixedly displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is performed. The main control board 920 sends a control command corresponding to the contents of the variable display to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 (see FIG. 24) to display a normal number. Using the symbols (1 to 9), a production (normal symbol variation production) is performed by a variable display in which a combination of three numbers of left, middle, and right is a stop symbol. The big hit lottery related to the first special symbol is won at about 1/23, and when the big hit lottery is won, the special game state is entered.

When the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol is won, one of two types of special game states of short opening and long opening occurs. The main control board 920 controls the lower central prize winning device 434 (see FIG. 7) to change its posture under the condition corresponding to the type of each special game state. By the control of the main control board 920, the player can hardly obtain the game ball in the special game state of the short opening and the game ball is hardly paid out from the pachinko machine 100, while the special game state of the long opening is provided. Then, the player can obtain a certain number or more of prize balls by playing the game by the right-handed game technique.

Here, from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940, at least one of the timing of executing the variable display before the occurrence of each special game state and the timing of starting the special game state are classified as jackpot types. The corresponding control command is transmitted, and the sub-control board 940 recognizes the big hit type based on the control command, and performs operation notification control for outputting information regarding necessary operation to the player. Details of the operation notification control will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the special gaming state, the gaming state to be transitioned differs depending on the jackpot type selected when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, and the first jackpot 1,4 returns to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the first big hit is 2, 5, the transition to a short-term short-time game state in which the time-saving state continues until the timing of one fluctuation start, and if the first big hit is 3, the time is shortened with "87 times" as the upper limit number of games. The state transitions to a long-term short game state where the state continues.

The short-term time saving game state is configured by combining the time saving state and the non-time saving state. In the short time saving game state, the time saving state is maintained until the first fluctuation starts, and when the first fluctuation starts, the time saving state transits to the non-time saving state.

When transitioning to the short-term short game state, the game method differs depending on whether or not the right to the unit game relating to the special symbol is reserved at the start timing of the short-term short game state. If the unit game right related to the special symbol is held even once, right after the start of the short-time short game state, the jackpot determination related to the special symbol is executed for the first held unit game right, and the big hit is won. If so, the jackpot type selection is also performed. Also, the selection of the content (variation time and stop symbol) of the variable display for the held unit game is performed. The main control board 920 transmits to the sub control board 940 a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display started during the short-term short game state, and the sub-control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. , A plurality of light emitting units 779A sequentially emit light, and finally the central light emitting unit 779A emits light to indicate winning of the lottery related to the special symbol, and any one of the light emitting units 779A finally deviated from the center emits light. Therefore, an effect indicating non-winning (hereinafter, also referred to as a whale roulette variation effect) is executed.

The whale roulette fluctuation effect is executed only once, which corresponds to the number of fluctuation displays started during the short-term short playing game state. If you win the whale roulette variation production, it becomes a big hit, and it shifts to a special game state, and if you are not winning (miss), you play a game with a left-handed game technique (hereinafter also called a left-handed game). Return to the normal game state. Since the big hit lottery related to the special symbol is won in approximately 1/23, when the whale roulette variation effect occurs, the special game state is transitioned in approximately 1/23. Since the type selection of the big hit in the short time saving game state is executed in the time saving state, even if any of the big hit types related to the first special symbol is selected, the long time saving game state after the special game state Move to.

When transitioning to the short-term short game state, if the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is not reserved even once, the right of the single unit game related to the special symbol is established after the short-term short game state is started. There is a need. This one-time unit game, the probability of transitioning to the long-term short-time gaming state is about 1/23, and in the normal gaming state, the long-term short-time gaming state is mainly achieved in the big winning lottery related to the first special symbol in which the starting winning occurs. It is significantly higher than the transition probability. Therefore, the player wants to obtain the right to the unit game as soon as possible to play the game. In this case, the time saving state in which the right start prize winning device 432 is likely to be in the entry permitting posture continues until the execution of the variable display is started once. Therefore, the player has a right start winning device 432 and a game area on the right side of the central structure 420 in which the starting device 436 for operating the right starting winning device 432 is arranged (a region where the game balls flow down and flows down). By the right-handed game technique in which the game ball flows down to the area (refer to FIG. 7), the starting prize for one execution of the variable display can be easily generated and the unit game right can be established.

When the game ball enters the right-start prize device 432 after transitioning to the short-time short game state, the starting prize of the second special symbol (the second starting prize) becomes the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol, and the jackpot is won. If so, the jackpot type selection is also performed, and the content of the variation display (variation time and stop symbol) is also selected. The main control board 920 transmits to the sub control board 940 a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display started during the short-term short game state, and the sub-control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. The whale roulette fluctuation effect. In this case, the winning probability of the lottery related to the first special symbol started in the short-time short game state and the winning probability of the lottery related to the second special symbol are set to the same probability (approximately 1/23). , The probability of transitioning to the long-term and short-time gaming state after winning is also set to be the same. For this reason, when the whale roulette variation effect is executed, regardless of whether it is a unit game related to the first special symbol or a unit game related to the second special symbol, the long-time and short-time game has the same expectation. It is possible to expect a transition to the state, and it is possible to show the progress of the game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the lottery result by the common whale roulette variation effect even if the types of special symbols are different.

During the whale roulette variation effect, it is in a non-time saving state instead of a time saving state, and is in a gaming state in which the right start winning device 432 is unlikely to take the entry permitting posture as compared with the time saving state. After the occurrence of the short-time and short-time gaming state, even if one ball has won the right start winning device 432 and the second start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) detects the winning of the gaming ball, the main control board 920 saves time. The state is switched to the control of the right start winning device 432 corresponding to the non-time saving state. Therefore, the game ball is easily consumed even if the game ball is continuously fired by the game by the right-handed game method (hereinafter, also referred to as right-handed game), and the player does not need to perform the firing operation.

When the result showing the lottery related to the special symbol is displayed in the whale roulette variation effect, the special game state occurs. This special game state corresponds to any one of a total of 7 types of the first big hit 1 to 5 and the second big hit 1 and 2, and in the short open special game state where the number of acquired balls is "0", depending on the player. It is not necessary to shoot a game ball, and in a long open special game state in which the number of acquired balls is equal to or more than a certain number, a prize ball can be acquired by a right-handed game.

After the special game state generated by winning the lottery related to the special symbol in the whale roulette variation effect, it becomes a long-term short game state. The long-time saving game state is a time-saving state in which the right start winning device 432 is easy to take the entry permissible posture until the 87th variation display is started or the special symbol is selected and the special game state is entered. Continues. The player can easily enter the game ball into the right start winning device 432 by the right hitting game.

When the game ball enters the right starting prize device 432 in the long-term short game state, the starting prize of the second special symbol (the second starting prize) becomes, and the right of the unit game occurs and the lottery relating to the second special symbol is performed. Then, the variable display is displayed in which the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed and displayed. The main control board 920 sends a control command corresponding to the contents of the variable display to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 24) to set the normal game state. Using a different numerical design (for example, a design in which the numbers normally displayed in red are displayed in yellow), a combination of three numbers of left, middle, and right is used as a stop design. ) Is executed. The big hit lottery related to the second special symbol is won in about 1/23, and when the big hit lottery is won, the special game state is transitioned to, and then the long-term short game state is started again.

In the short-term gaming state for a long time, the starting winning of the second special symbol mainly occurs. For this reason, when the big hit lottery is won, it is easy to make a transition to a long-open special game state by the second big hits 1 and 2, and a prize ball can be obtained by continuing the right-handed game.

From the start of the long-term short game state, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the non-winning is fixedly displayed in the variable display relating to the 86th special symbol, and after that, the 87th variable display is started, the main control board 920 is displayed. The control of the right start winning device 432 is switched from the time saving game state to the control corresponding to the normal game state. Therefore, after the 87th variation display is started, the game ball is likely to be consumed even if the game ball is continuously shot by the right-handed game, and the player does not need to perform the shooting operation. Then, when the stop symbol corresponding to the non-winning result is confirmed and displayed on the 87th variation display, the long-time short game state ends and the normal game state returns.

As described above, as the transition pattern to the long-time shortened gaming state, the normal transition pattern that occurs when the start winning of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state by the left-handed game has been explained, but the pachinko machine 100 has other patterns. Depending on the transition pattern, the normal gaming state transits to the long-term short gaming state.

As another transition pattern, firstly, a transition pattern is set which is triggered by the case where the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632 during the normal game state of the left-handed game. This transition pattern becomes a starting winning prize (second starting winning prize) of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning prize device 632 during the normal gaming state. In the unit game related to the second start winning, the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is executed, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot type selection is also performed, and the content of the variable display (variable time and stop symbol) Selection is also done. The main control board 920 transmits to the sub control board 940 a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display during the normal game state related to the second special symbol, and the sub control board 940 displays the decorative symbol display device 779. Control and execute whale roulette fluctuation effect. In this way, the whale roulette fluctuation effect is a case where the start winning of the second special symbol occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning device 432 in the short-time short playing state, and the upper middle starting winning device during the normal gaming state. It is set that the same effect is executed when the start winning of the second special symbol is generated by the entry of the game ball into 632.

Here, in the lottery related to the second special symbol, the probability of transitioning to the long-term time saving state after the winning is set to be the same in the non-time saving state and the time saving state (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when the whale roulette variation effect is executed, which of the two starting winning devices 432 and 632 related to the second special symbol is the game ball entering as the unit game related to the second special symbol? Regardless, it is possible to expect the transition to the long-term and short-time gaming state with the same expectation. Therefore, even if the game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is different, by displaying the lottery result by the common whale roulette variation effect, it is possible that the transition probability to the long-term and short-time gaming state is equal to the player. Can be easily understood.

Also, as another transition pattern to the long-time short game state, the game ball enters the lower middle starting prize device 431 during the normal game state of left-handed game and the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, and the winning is won. The case where the first big hit 3 is selected as the big hit type selected in (3) is set. In the case of this transition pattern, unlike other transition patterns, transition to the long-term short game state is performed without passing through the whale roulette variation effect. For this reason, the player can not only visually recognize the winning by the whale roulette variation effect for the long-term and short-time gaming state, but also can provide the gaming property that expects an unexpected transition pattern.

In this way, the pachinko machine 100, as a big hit type related to the first special symbol, the first big hit 2,5, which is a short-term short-time gaming state transition to the short-term short-time gaming state depending on the selection condition in the non-time saving state corresponding to the normal gaming state, The first jackpot 1-5 that transition to the long-term short-time gaming state according to the selection condition in the short-time gaming state corresponding to the time-shortening gaming state is provided, and as the big-hit type related to the second special symbol, either the normal gaming state or the short-term short-time gaming state. Also, a big hit (second big hit 1, 2) for transitioning to a long-time short game state is provided. Therefore, as a starting prize of the first special symbol, a game property is provided in which the game ball enters the lower middle starting prize device 431 a plurality of times as a starting prize, and gradually transitions to a short-term short-term gaming state via a short-term short-term gaming state. Meanwhile, it is possible to add a game property in which the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 and the game state transits to the short-term long-term gaming state by the result of one lottery.

Next, the control of the main control board 920 at the start of the short-time short game state will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing control of the main control board 920 at the start of the short-time short game state. The control at the time of starting the short-time short game state is executed as a part of the process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) executed by the main control board 920. Control of the short-time short game state differs depending on whether or not the unit game right relating to the special symbol is reserved, and FIG. 30(A) for the case where the right of the unit game is reserved at the start of the short-time short game state. ) Is mainly described, and then, a case in which there is no right reservation of a unit game will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

The main control board 920 is provided with a flag (a part of the RAM of the main control board 920) as a plurality of storage means for storing a game state in progress, and a special game state is being executed as a part of the flag. A special game state flag that is turned on and a time saving state flag that is turned on during the time saving state are provided. The short-time short game state is a game state in which a transition occurs in part when a big hit is won based on the start winning of the first special symbol.

When all the rounds constituting the special gaming state corresponding to the winning of the jackpot are finished and the ending period thereafter is finished, it is time to end the special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 30(A), the main control board 920 turns off the special game state flag and turns on the time saving state flag to start the short time saving game state.

When the right of the unit game is reserved at the start of the short-time short game state, the variable display related to the special symbol can be started by ending the special game state. The main control board 920 executes the jackpot determination/type selection and the variable display content setting corresponding to the held unit game right during the time saving state, and the special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 (see FIG. 7). The changing state of is switched from the stopped state to the changing state (see FIG. 30A). At the timing of switching the variation state, the main control board 920 transmits a control command to the sub control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and the variation state of the decorative symbol display device 779 is also switched from being stopped to being changed.

When the first variation display in the short-time saving game state is started, the main control board 920 turns off the time-saving state flag (see FIG. 30(A)), and the game ball easily enters the right start winning device 432. The control corresponding to the non-time saving state, which is more difficult than the time saving state, is started. The process of setting to start the first variable display and the process of setting from the time saving state flag being turned on to being turned off are such that the right start winning device 432 takes the entry permission posture and the game ball starts right. It is preferable to be executed in a short time so that the winning device 432 cannot enter, and it is preferable to be executed in one timer interrupt process of the main control board 920.

When the game ball enters the starting device 436 (see FIG. 7) related to the normal symbol in the state where the time saving state flag is off, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the starting switch 446 (see FIG. 10) is temporarily When turned on, the entry of the game ball into the starter 436 is detected by the main control board 920. When the start switch 446 is turned on, the variable display related to the ordinary symbol is executed, and if the lottery related to the ordinary symbol is won, the right entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) is turned on, and the right start winning device 432 (FIG. (Refer to 7) assumes the approach allowable posture corresponding to the non-time saving state.

Here, in the non-time saving state, the time (variation time) of one variation display related to the ordinary symbol is preferably set to the same selection condition as the variation time in the time saving state to simplify the control relating to the ordinary symbol. .. In addition, the variation time in the time saving state as the variation time related to the normal symbol is less than approximately 1.0 seconds, and preferably set to less than 0.1 seconds, the game relating to the first special symbol in the short time and short gaming state. It is preferable to speed up the start of the game, and by doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling depressed by spending a lot of time before the start winning is generated.

Next, a case where the right of the unit game is not reserved at the start of the short-term short game state will be described. When the ending period of the special gaming state ends, the main control board 920 turns off the special gaming state flag and turns on the time saving state flag in order to start the short time short playing state, as shown in FIG. 30(B). When the short time short game state is started, the variable display related to the special symbol can be started, but the main control board 920 does not have the right to hold the unit game, and therefore waits for the start winning.

When the player plays a right-handed game in a situation in which the time saving state flag is turned on and the time saving state continues, the flow-down area (see FIG. 7) in which the starting device 436 and the right starting winning device 432 are arranged is displayed. A game ball flows down. When the game ball enters the starting device 436 during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 30B, the start switch 446 is temporarily turned on and the game ball enters the starting device 436 on the main control board 920. To be detected. When the start switch 446 is turned on, the variable display related to the normal symbol is executed, and if the lottery related to the normal symbol is won, the right entry restriction solenoid 463 is turned on, and the right start winning device 432 is the entry corresponding to the time saving state. Take an acceptable posture.

The admissible posture for one win in the time saving state is set to a time (approximately 2.4 seconds) that is sufficiently longer than the firing time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the right start prize winning device 432, and the entry of the game ball is detected by the second start prize switch 442. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second starting prize switch 442, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained, and the main control board 920 responds to the right of the unit game generated by the starting prize during the time saving state. The jackpot determination/type selection to be performed and the content setting of the variation display are executed, and the variation state of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 472 (see FIG. 10) is switched from the stopped state to the variation state (see FIG. 30(B)).

When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second start prize switch 442, the main control board 920 turns off the time saving state flag and switches from the time saving state to the control of the right start winning device 432 corresponding to the non-time saving state. .. Thereby, even if the subsequent lottery related to the normal symbol is won, the right start winning a prize device 432 takes the entry permission posture corresponding to the non-time saving state, and the start winning of the second special symbol in the short-time saving game state is once. It is easy to limit the time until the variable display is executed.

In addition, when the right of the unit game is not reserved at the start of the short time short game state, the starting prize of the second special symbol is easily limited to only once. Specifically, as the control of the right entry restriction solenoid 463 by the main control board 920, the entry of one game ball into the right start winning device 432 is the second start in the situation where the entry starting allowance posture is taken during the time saving state. When detected by the winning switch 442, the main control board 920 turns off the right entry regulation solenoid 463 so as to shift the entry permitted posture to the entry prohibited posture even before the maximum entry permitted time elapses. That is, the maximum allowable number of entry into the right-start prize winning device 432 in the time saving state is set to the number (1) required for the number of times the variable display of the short-time saving game state is executed, and the right-start winning device exceeding the required number is set. It is configured to easily prevent the game ball from entering the 432.

In this way, in the case where a short-time saving game state occurs, if one variable display reaching the upper limit of the time-saving number (upper limit game number) is held at the start, immediately after the start of the short-time saving game state The variable display is started, the time saving state flag is turned off at the timing when the execution of the variable display is started, and the control of the right start winning device 432 corresponds to the control (easy entry control) corresponding to the time saving state to the non-time saving state. It is changed to control (approach normal control). Further, even when the variable display is started during the short-time saving game state, the time-saving state flag is turned off, and the control of the right start winning device 432 is changed from the easy entry control to the normal entry control. Therefore, when the first variation display reaching the upper limit of the time saving number (upper limit number of games) is being executed during the short time saving game state, the state where the right start winning device 432 game ball is easily entered by the entry normal control. Even if the player executes the right-handed game, the game ball hardly enters the right start winning device 432. Therefore, in the short-time short game state, the player can concentrate his or her consciousness on the variable display during execution and the display of the result information without performing the operation of entering the game ball into the game area. Therefore, a display corresponding to the winning is made as the result information of the variable display, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the transition to the long-term short game state.

In addition, the timing of turning off the time saving state flag for the number of times of the upper limit game in the short time saving game state and the control of changing the control of the starting winning device 432 from the easy entry control to the normal entry control are the long time short game state. The same control as that of the 87th process corresponding to the number of up and down games in FIG.

<Notification control of operation instruction information>
Next, the operation notification control by the sub control board 940 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the operation notification control process by the sub control board 940.

Similar to the main control board 920, the control processing in the sub control board 940 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started in response to recovery from a power failure state and a command that is executed when a command from the main control board 920 is received. It is composed of an interrupt process and a timer interrupt process which is executed by interrupting the main process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 10 ms (milliseconds)). The operation notification control process is configured as a part of the timer interrupt process, and is a control command from the main control board 920 corresponding to each game state being executed, and a control relating to the contents of the variable display transmitted for the execution of the unit game. It is executed based on the command.

The operation notification control process is a process provided to easily acquire the game value that the player can obtain regardless of his/her experience and to suppress the consumption of extra game balls. In this operation notification control process, the player is informed of whether or not a shooting operation is necessary and whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game requires a game.

First, the type of operation notification by the operation notification control of the sub control board 940 will be described. Three types of operation notification are set: left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and firing unnecessary information output.

The left-handed hit information output is executed by the output of information for instructing the left-handed hit game for the player. Specifically, a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, the left end) is displayed with characters for instructing a left-handed game, such as "please return to left-handed play". In addition, a top ball decoration 611, an upper left front decoration 612, and an upper right front decoration 613 (refer to FIG. 13) provided on the upper portion of the central structure 420 (see FIG. 7) form a passage through which a game ball flows down by a left-handed game. The light-emitting body provided on the member may be turned on to indicate the downflow area of the game ball. In addition, the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, and the right big winning device 433 arranged in the flow-down area of the game ball by the right-handed game are dimmed or extinguished, and the game ball is allowed to flow down. The area may be indicated.

The output of left-handed information may be performed by the output of audio by the audio devices 281 and 280 (see FIG. 10). Specifically, when the left-handed game is advantageous to the player and the situation where the right-handed game is played is detected by the sub-control board 940 through the main control board 920 (for example, a game ball enters the starter 436). If you do), repeat the sound output such as "Please return to the left" or "Aim and shoot at the left side" for a certain number of times (for example, twice) or until the execution of the left-handed game is detected. The player may be instructed to execute the left-handed game.

The output of the right-handed information is also executed by the output of the information instructing the right-handed game, like the left-handed information output. For example, a character such as “Please hit right” is displayed on a part (for example, right end) of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7), and the character is placed in the flow-down area of the game ball by the right-handed game. The light emitting elements provided in the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, and the right big winning device 433 (see FIG. 7) emit light from the state of left hitting information output, and overlap with the downflow area of the game ball by the left hitting game. This is executed by at least one of the information output such as the provided light emitter being dimmed or extinguished, or the sound device 281 or 282 (see FIG. 10) outputting a right-handed information output sound.

The output of the non-launching information is executed by generating a state that indicates that the player does not need to fire. For example, in a flow-down area of both left-handed game and right-handed game, characters such as "no need to fire" are displayed on a part (for example, left and right edges) of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). This is performed by outputting at least one of the information such that all the light emitting elements provided in the overlapping state are dimmed or turned off, or the sound "no need to fire" is output by the acoustic devices 281 and 282 (see FIG. 10).

In the operation notification control process, as shown in FIG. 31, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state or the time saving state (S2001). If it is neither in the special game state nor in the time saving state (S2001:N), the whale. It is determined whether or not the roulette variation effect is being produced (abbreviated as roulette variation effect in FIG. 31) (S2002).

If the whale roulette variation effect is being performed in the process of S2002 (S2002: Y), the process proceeds to the emission unnecessary notification process S2003. In the emission unnecessary notification process S2003, the emission unnecessary information output corresponding to the emission unnecessary state is executed. During the whale roulette fluctuation production, since it is a non-time saving game state, even if a right-handed game is performed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning device 432, the starting condition is hardly satisfied, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. is there. Moreover, since it is a big hit with a probability of approximately 1 in 23 and can transit to a long-term and short-time gaming state via a special gaming state, the player can stop the firing operation and display a lottery result until the whale is displayed. It is possible to provide a game feature that can raise the sense of expectation in the process of displaying the roulette variation effect and displaying the result.

In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the whale roulette variation effect is not in progress (S2002: N), it is determined whether or not it is in the long-time short game state and is in the 87th variation corresponding to the final time. If it is the 87th variation (S2004: Y), the emission unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. Also, during execution of the last time variable display during the long time saving game state, it is in the non-time saving state, and even if the right hitting game is performed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning device 432 and the starting condition is almost satisfied. It is also difficult to obtain a prize ball. In addition, since the big hit type is selected in accordance with the condition related to the second special symbol in the final time of the long-time short game state, it is more advantageous for the player than after transitioning to the normal game state due to non-winning in the variable display. It is easy to shift to a short-term gaming state for a long time. For this reason, the player should pay attention to the time saving medium symbol variation effect until the shooting operation is stopped and the lottery result is displayed, and provide a gaming property that can raise expectations in the process of displaying the result. You can

Also, during the whale roulette fluctuation production, and during the last time fluctuation display during the long-term short-time gaming state, if the left-handed information output is executed even if it is in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation display at the last time is not The player may be given a bad impression by giving an impression as to whether the result of the winning is suggested before the result is displayed. Moreover, since the right-handed game must be played again when the final variable display has been won, when the left-handed information output is executed, the left and right game technique switching operations become frequent. However, it may give a bad impression to the player as promoting unnecessary operation. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the emission unnecessary notification process S2003 in a part of the non-time saving state.

When it is determined in the process of S2004 that the long-time short game state is not changing during the 87th time (S2004: N), it is necessary to execute the left-handed game in the normal game state. In this case, it is determined whether or not the right-handed game is executed (S2005), and if the right-handed game is executed (S2005: Y), the left-handed instruction voice output process is performed as the left-handed instruction voice output. The process is executed (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2007. As a result, it is possible to easily show to a player who is interested in something other than a game, such as touching a mobile phone, without paying attention to the game area, that the game is not properly played. On the other hand, in the process of S2005, if the right-handed game is not executed (S2005N), the left-handed notification process S2007 is executed, and then the operation notification control process is ended.

In the left-handed hit notification process S2007, a notification visually recognizable by the player is performed as the left-handed hit information output. For this reason, the left-handed information output cannot be recognized unless the game board 400 (see FIG. 7) is visually recognized compared to the instruction by the voice output, but it is suggested to the player that the left-handed game is required. can do.

In the process of S2001, when it is determined that the special game state or the time saving state is in progress (S2001: Y), it is determined whether the short term short game state is in progress (S2011). S2011: Y), as a part of the right-handing information output, a right-handing instruction voice output process S2012 is executed, and then, a right-handing notification process S2013 is performed as a right-handing information output to give a visually recognizable notification to the player. Then, the operation notification control process is ended. As a result, during the short-term short game state, the execution of the right-handed game is instructed by the voice output and the information output by the display.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the short-time short game state is not in progress (S2011:N), it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state (S2021), and if it is in the special game state (S2021:Y). ), it is determined whether or not the ending period of the first jackpot 2,5 (S2022), if not during the ending period of the first jackpot 2,5 (S2022: N), the special gaming state is the first jackpot It is determined whether it is due to 1 to 3 (S2023).

When it is determined in the process of S2023 that the special game state by the first big hit 1-3 is not (S2023:N), the long open special game states 4 and 5 are being executed, and the player is in the center size by the right-handed game. It is a situation in which the game ball can be acquired by entering the game ball into the winning device 434. In this case, it is determined whether the left-handed game is being executed (S2024), and when the execution of the left-handed game is detected (S2024:Y), the right-handed instruction voice output process S2012 and the right-handed notification process are performed. By executing S2013, execution of the right-handed game is instructed. In the processing of S2024, if the execution of the left-handed game is not detected (S2024:N), the right-handed instruction voice output processing S2012 is skipped, and the right-handed notification processing S2013 is executed.

Here, in the left-handed instruction voice output process S2006, the left-handed game is executed by the general winning device 639 in which the game ball can be detected by the left-handed game, the contact sensor 665 of the left warp passage 628, and the like. This is the process of setting the audio output for a fixed time when passage is detected.If the audio output is set once, the audio output for the fixed time is output by another control process in the timer interrupt processing. To be executed. The same applies to the right-handing instruction voice output process S2012.

In the processing of S2023, when it is determined that the special game state of the first big hit 1 to 3 is in progress (S2023: Y), the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003 is executed. Since the number of balls to be acquired is 0 in the special game states of the first big hits 1 to 3, the player refrains from emitting game balls based on the information indicating that emission is unnecessary by the emission unnecessary notification processing S2003, and an extra game is generated. The consumption of the sphere can be suppressed.

In the process of S2021, when it is determined that it is not in the special game state (S2021: N), it is determined whether the number of times (holding number) to hold the execution of the unit game related to the special symbol is equal to or more than the remaining short time count. (S2025).

Here, the sub-control board 940 illuminates and displays the decorative symbol display device 479 and the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 479 and the left and right sides thereof, for each type of special symbol, among the illuminating units corresponding to the maximum retention times of the retention times. The control of the lighting display of the number of times of holding is controlled by the sub control board 940 based on the number of times of holding transmitted from the main control board 920 and a control command capable of identifying the symbol type, and corresponds to the number of times of holding. To control the number of lighting displays. The control command capable of identifying the number of times of holding and the type of symbol is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940 at the timing when the number of times of holding increases based on the start winning of the special symbol and the timing when the variable display is started. ..

Also, the remaining number of times saved is the remaining number of times that variable display can be executed in the time saving game state. When the short-term short-time gaming state and the long-term short-time gaming state are started, at the start timing, the main control board 920 identifies the start of the time-shortening gaming state and the remaining number of times that variable display can be executed in the time-shortening gaming state. A possible control command is transmitted to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 can recognize the start of the time saving game state and whether the time saving game state is the short time short game state or the long time short game state. ing. After the time saving game state is started, at the timing when the variable display is started, the main control board 920 transmits a control command that can identify the remaining short time count that is subtracted once by the execution of the variable display, and the sub control. The board 940 is capable of recognizing the remaining short time count after updating due to execution of variable display.

In the process of S2025, when it is determined that the number of holding times is less than the remaining short time count (S2025:N), the process proceeds to the process of S2024, and the right hitting game is instructed by the processes of S2024, S2012 and S2013. When the number of holding times is less than the remaining number of shortened hours, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the right start winning device 432 in order to execute the variable display in the time saving game state. Because of the situation in which it is easy to enter, prompt execution of a right-handed game is encouraged.

On the other hand, in the process of S2025, when it is determined that the number of holding times is equal to or more than the remaining short time count (S2025:Y), the process proceeds to S2003, and the emission unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. If the number of holding times is equal to or more than the remaining short time count, it means that the start winning that needs to be executed has already occurred in the time saving game state, and in this case, based on the information indicating that the shooting is unnecessary, the shooting unnecessary information is output in S2003. Refrain from launching game balls. As a result, it is possible to easily end the time-saving game state with a number close to the executable number set in advance as the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the variable display as a time saving game state is excessively performed, and the player is urged to perform a right-handed game only during the period required for the time saving game state. For, it is possible to easily operate the pachinko machine 100 in a form close to the winning probability in the set time saving game state.

Also in the process of S2022, when it is determined that the ending period of the first big hit 2, 5 is in progress (S2022: Y), it is determined by the process of S2025 whether the number of holding times is equal to or more than the remaining short time count (S2025). If the number of holding times is equal to or more than the remaining short time count (S2025:Y), the emission unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. Since the first jackpots 2, 5 transition to the short-term short working state after the special gaming state, if the number of holdings is updated to 1 or more corresponding to the short-term remaining number executed in the short-term short gaming state, the right Since it is not necessary to continue the batting game and consume the game ball during the ending period, it is possible to restrain the consumption of the game ball by outputting information that does not require launch. When the ending period of the first big hit 4 is in progress, regardless of whether or not the number of holding times is more than or equal to the number of remaining time reductions, the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003 may be executed, whereby the special gaming state. Even in a situation where the game state shifts to the normal game state after, the consumption of the game ball can be restrained.

In the process of S2022, when it is determined that the ending period of the first big hit 2, 5 is in progress (S2022: Y), and when it is determined by the process of S2025 that the number of holding times is less than the remaining short time count ( (S2025:N), the process proceeds to S2024, and the right-handed game is instructed by the processes of S2024, S2012 and S2013. As a result, immediately after the start of the short-time short game state, it is possible to easily generate the start winning of the special symbol necessary for the execution of the short-time short game state.

Here, after the first big hit occurs via the normal symbol variation effect, if the period until the second variation display by the whale roulette variation effect is executed becomes long, the variation display time is stopped. Even if the expectation for the transition to the long-term and short-time gaming state due to the occurrence of the second big hit is once increased by the first big hit, the expectation may be reduced. On the other hand, by the processing of S2022 and S2025, by making a determination to continue the right-handed game from the ending period before the start of the short-term short game state, the start winning of the special symbol necessary for the execution of the short-term short game state Can be easily generated at an early stage, and an expectation in the second variable display can be easily maintained.

In this way, the sub-control board 940, as the operation notification control process, performs a left hitting notification process for visually recognizing a player as an output of left hitting information corresponding to the execution of the left hitting game in the normal game state. In S2007, in the special game state and the time saving game state, a right hitting notification process S2013 for giving a notice visually recognizable by the player as right hitting information corresponding to the execution of the right hitting game, and the first jackpot 2,5 Before the end of the special game state corresponding to the ending of, or before the end of the long-term short game state, reach the upper limit (the upper limit number of games) of the number of times saved in the short-term short game state or the long-term short game state If the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times required until is suspended (S2025:Y), a determination process for generating a period in which the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed without outputting right-handing information (S2025) Equipped with.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) In the above embodiment, the flow-down restriction unit 623 is configured to receive the game balls distributed by the roof 611B and the distribution device 622, but the flow-down restriction unit 623 is not necessarily the roof 611B or the distribution device 622. It does not need to be a configuration for receiving the game balls distributed by. For example, it may be configured to directly receive the game ball flowing down the upper game area.

(2) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to the left side or the right side by the roof 611B are configured to be discharged to the left side game area through the flow-down restriction unit 623, but the game balls distributed to the right side. With respect to the above, it is not always necessary to pass the flow-down restricting portion 623. For example, the game balls sorted to the right by the roof 611B may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100.

It should be noted that in recent years, due to an increase in the size of the central structure and the like, there is a tendency for the size and arrangement of the region in which the game balls flow down in the game region to be limited, but like the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment, the roof 611B is used. Since the game balls distributed to either the left or right are guided to the common game area (that is, the left game area), the limited game area can be effectively utilized.

(3) In the above embodiment, the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B (first distribution unit) and the distribution device 622 (second distribution unit), but both distribution units are not necessarily required. There is no need to provide it. For example, the distribution unit may be only the roof 611B. In such a case, the starting winning of the second special symbol may be established based on the game ball having entered the passage opening 621.

(4) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the roof 611B having the upwardly convex curved shape is adopted as the first distributing portion for distributing the game balls flowing down the upper gaming area, but the shape of the first distributing portion is adopted. Is not necessarily limited to an upwardly convex curved shape. For example, it may be a stage, a clune, or the like that sorts the first distribution unit to either the left side, the right side, or the passage opening. Alternatively, a movable object that moves in a predetermined direction may be used, and the game ball may be distributed to either the left side, the right side, or the passage opening depending on the movement of the movable object.

(5) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to the left or right by the roof 611B are configured to be guided to the left side game area by the flow-down restriction unit 623, but the destination guided by the flow-down restriction unit 623 is not always required. , The game area on the side close to the entrance of the game area (that is, the exit of the launch passage 401B), that is, the left side game area which is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 need not be limited.

For example, when the entrance of the game area is provided on the right side, that is, when the game ball is launched from the right side, the flow-down restricting unit 623 causes the game balls distributed by the roof 611B to the central structure 420. Alternatively, the game area may be guided from the right side (hereinafter, also referred to as “right side game area”). In this modified example as well, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment, the game balls distributed to the side farther from the entrance of the game area (that is, the left side) is the right side game area which is the game area closer to the entrance. Can be entered.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the game balls distributed to the left or right by the roof 611B are configured to be guided to the left game area by the common flow-down restriction unit 623, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls fall to different downflow restricting portions depending on whether the game balls are distributed to the left side or the right side by the roof 611.

In this modified example, the flow-down restricting unit in which the game balls distributed to the left fall and the flow-down restricting unit in which the game balls distributed to the right fall, even if their inclined surfaces have the same inclination angle, Different tilt angles may be used. By setting the inclination angles of the inclined surfaces of the flow-down restricting portions to different angles, it is possible to make the acceleration modes of the game balls discharged from the outlets of the respective flow-down restricting portions different.

Further, the flow-down restricting unit in which the game balls distributed to the left side fall and the flow-down restricting unit in which the game balls distributed to the right side fall are arranged in a substantially C shape in a front view of the pachinko machine 100. Good. In such a case, it is discharged to the left side game area or the right side game area depending on the distribution direction.

(7) In the above embodiment, the flow-down restricting portion 623 has a configuration in which the inclined surface is inclined downward from the right to the left, but if the game ball has a shape that can move to the left side by its own weight on the flow-down restricting portion 623. , It is not always necessary to limit the descending slope from right to left. For example, the slope of the flow-down restricting portion 623 may have a shape such as a curve or a wavy shape that allows the game ball to move to the left side by its own weight on the flow-down restricting portion 623. Further, it may be configured to carry the game ball to the left game area by moving the movable body.

(8) In the above embodiment, the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction, but the upper middle starting winning prize device 632 does not necessarily have to be movable. For example, the upper middle starting winning device 632 may be fixedly provided (that is, not moved) at a predetermined position.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the game ball that has entered the upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper middle starting winning device 632 may be configured to penetrate in a direction facing from the entrance, and the game ball that has entered the upper middle starting winning device 632 may be dropped onto the downflow restricting portion 623. According to such a modified example, it is possible not only to enter the upper middle starting prize device 632 but also to enter the lower middle starting prize device 431 in the left game area.

(10) In the above embodiment, the upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured as the starting winning device according to the second special symbol, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper middle starting winning device 632 is simply awarded. It may be configured as a general winning device for giving a ball.

(11) In the above embodiment, the plurality of protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in the direction intersecting the continuous direction of the left and right downflow passages 652 and 653. However, the number of installations is not always plural. There is no need to limit. For example, the protrusions 612D and 613D may be provided in each of the flow-down passages 652 and 653. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the number of the protrusions 612D and 613D provided in each of the downflow passages 652 and 653 is five, but the number is not limited as long as at least one is provided.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the protrusions 612D and 613D are erected on the back sides of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A, and the portions corresponding to the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D are visually recognized as dark portions to serve as passage display portions. Although it is configured to function, the function as the passage display portion is not necessarily limited to being visually recognized as a dark portion. For example, a line extending in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652 and 653 may be drawn on the back side of each of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A with a coloring agent having low light transmittance. Alternatively, the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A may be made to emit light so as to be distinguishable from the light used to decorate the decoration bodies 612A and 613A so that the player can visually recognize the lines extending in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652 and 653.

(13) In the above embodiment, the continuously extending (that is, a series of) streaks resulting from the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D are made visible to the player as a passage display unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. No need. For example, the passage display portion may be configured to allow the player to visually recognize a line extending intermittently (that is, a dotted line shape) in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652 and 653 as the passage display portion.

(14) In the above embodiment, the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in the inside of the central structure 420, more specifically, in the left and right flow-down passages 652 and 653 provided on the back side of the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613. Although the passage is used for displaying the passage, the passage for displaying the passage by the passage display unit is not necessarily limited to the passage provided inside the central structure 420. For example, with respect to a passage that passes through the back side of a structure other than the central structure 420, a passage display unit such as a protrusion may display the passage.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, the passage display using the protrusions 612D and 613D is performed for the downward passages 652 and 653 extending in the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. Need not necessarily be limited to a passage extending in the vertical direction. For example, for a passage having a shape that allows the game ball to reach the exit by its own weight, such as a passage extending from the upper left to the lower right, the passage display unit such as the protrusion may display the passage.

(16) In the above embodiments, the surfaces of the ornament main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as the undulating surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surfaces of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A may be smooth surfaces without undulations.

(17) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479, depending on the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the starting winning of the first special symbol, or the second special symbol lottery based on the starting winning of the second special symbol. Although the decorative pattern is configured to be displayed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display device 479 is to display a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the starting winning of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol lottery based on the starting winning of the second special symbol. The result may be displayed on another decorative pattern display device 779.

(18) In the above embodiment, the general winning award device 639 is provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the downflow restriction unit 623, but the game ball received by the downflow restriction unit 623. The device provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of is not necessarily limited to the general winning device. For example, like the lower middle starting winning a prize device 431, the starting winning a prize device (that is, the starting winning a prize device which relates to the special design) where the right of the lottery is given on the basis of entering, of the game ball which the flow control section 623 received It may be configured to be provided at a position where the possibility of passage differs depending on the position.

(19) In the above embodiment, the case where the entrance (passage opening 621) of the upper middle starting winning device 632 is provided above the distribution unit (first distribution unit) by the roof 611B has been described. It does not need to be provided at a position, and may be provided on the side (right side or left side) of the upper middle starting winning device 632 corresponding to the downstream side of the distribution part by the roof 611B, and the number of entrances is limited to one. Alternatively, it may be two or more.

(20) In the above embodiment, the two stages 622C and 625 are arranged vertically, but the arrangement of these stages is not necessarily limited to the top and bottom, and the stage corresponds to the downstream side of the stage. Appropriate arrangements can be taken according to the positions of various winning apparatuses such as the starting winning apparatus that are arranged in the same manner. Even when the stages 622C and 625 are not arranged above and below, if the game balls sorted by one stage do not enter the corresponding winning device arranged on the downstream side of the stage, the game concerned. It is preferable to provide a route capable of guiding the ball to the other stage.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 is interposed between the stages 622C and 625, but the invention is not limited to this. The stage 622C and the stage 625 sandwich the decorative pattern display device 479. It may be arranged without.

(21) In the above embodiment, the two stages 622C and 625 are configured to have the rolling surfaces configured to have similar shapes with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, but the rolling surfaces of the respective stages 622C and 625 are The shape does not have to be similar to the rolling behavior of the game ball.

(22) In the above embodiment, the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 each have a configuration in which the rolling surface includes an uneven surface including a convex surface and concave surfaces arranged on the left and right sides of the convex surface. The shape of the rolling surface in 625 does not necessarily have to include the above-mentioned uneven surface, and various rolling surfaces can be used as long as the rolling surface functions as a stage in which the game ball reciprocates left and right. Can be adopted.

(23) In the above embodiment, when the game ball distributed by the upper stage 622C does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the game ball is a downflow restriction unit 623, a left game area, and a left warp. By moving the passage 628 to the downstream side by its own weight, it is configured to be guided to the lower stage 625, but as a route for guiding the game balls sorted by the upper stage 622C to the lower stage 625, The route is not limited to the route using the weight of the ball, and may be a route using a movable body that can receive the game ball.

(24) In the above embodiment, among the recesses formed in the upper and lower stages 622C and 625, the discharge direction of the game ball in the middle recesses 622D and 625A is different, but it is formed in each stage 622C and 625. Alternatively, the recesses may have the same discharge direction. The number of recesses formed in each of the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 is not limited to three as exemplified in the above embodiment, and an appropriate number such as 2 or less or 4 or more can be adopted. Further, the recesses in the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 whose discharge directions are different from each other are not limited to one location (recesses 622D and 625A) illustrated in the above embodiment, and may be two or more locations.

(25) In the above embodiment, the lower middle starting prize winning device 431 arranged downstream of the stage 625 is fixedly provided, whereas the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 arranged downstream of the stage 622C is fixed. Although it is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which these middle-start prize devices 431 and 632 are both fixedly provided, or to reciprocate in the lateral direction.

(26) In the above embodiment, the contact sensor 662 is illustrated as a sensor that detects a game ball passing through the left distribution path 622A and the right distribution path 622B. However, various sensors such as an optical sensor and a magnetic sensor can be adopted. Similarly, the contact sensor 665 is not limited to the contact sensor as long as it can detect the game ball, and various sensors such as an optical sensor and a magnetic sensor can be adopted.

(27) In the above-described embodiment, the contact sensor 662 is arranged on each of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B. However, as long as the game ball entering the stage 622C can be detected, The position is not limited to the position illustrated in the above embodiment, and an appropriate position can be adopted as the position where the contact sensor 662 is provided. For example, the contact sensor 662 may be provided on the passage before branching from the passage port 621 to the left distribution passage 622A or the right distribution passage 622B. According to this modification, the number of contact sensors 662 to be installed may be one. In addition, a contact sensor may be provided on the stage 622C to detect a game ball that has entered through the passage opening 621 and reached the stage 622C.

Similarly, regarding the lower stage 625 as well, in the above embodiment, the contact sensor 665 is arranged on the passage near the exit of the left warp passage 628, but at a position where the game ball entering the stage 625 can be detected. If so, the position is not limited to the position illustrated in the above embodiment, and an appropriate position can be adopted as the position where the contact sensor 665 is provided. For example, a contact sensor or an optical sensor may be provided at the entrance of the left warp passage 628 to detect a game ball entering the left warp passage 628. A contact sensor may be provided on the stage 625 to detect a game ball that has entered the stage 625 via the left warp passage 628.

(28) In the above embodiment, when the game ball entered the stage 625, it was necessary to pass through the left warp passage 628, but the game ball sorted by the stage 622C entered the upper middle start winning device 632. If not, the game ball may be guided to the stage 622C by another route other than the left warp passage 628.

(29) In the above embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, the movable body 710 is moved and the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is moved. However, the moving possibility 710 is suggested to be generated by moving one of the movable body 710 and the decorative pattern Z without moving both. It may be configured to.

(30) In the above embodiment, the movable body 710 is moved upward, which is the side on which the upper middle starting prize winning device 632 is located, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning prize device 632. However, the moving direction of the movable body 710 is not necessarily limited to the side on which the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located. For example, when such an approach possibility occurs, the movable body 710 may be moved in a predetermined direction in order to suggest that fact. The same applies to the moving direction of the decorative pattern Z.

(31) In the above embodiment, the moving direction of the movable body 710 when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 is set to the direction from the initial position to the variable display position. However, the direction may be different from the direction from the initial position to the variable display position.

(32) In the above embodiment, the movable body 710 having the decorative symbol display device 779 and capable of performing the variable display of the second special symbol causes the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting prize device 632. It was diverted as a movable body to be moved in case of. Instead of this, as a movable body that is moved when the possibility of approach occurs, a dedicated movable body that is moved in such a case may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body 710 located at the intermediate position or the like overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 479, but the movable body 710 may not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 479 in the moving range. .. That is, the movable body 710 may be configured to move without overlapping the decorative symbol display device 479.

(33) In the above embodiment, the possibility of entering the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632 and the case of performing variable display of the second special symbol using the decorative symbol display device 779 are movable. Although the body 710 is arranged at different positions (that is, the intermediate position and the variable display position), the movable body 710 may be arranged at the same position in any case. In such a modification, for example, after the movable body 710 is located at a predetermined position (for example, a position corresponding to the variable display position) due to the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632, When the second special symbol lottery performed by entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 as a result of the possibility of entering is a big hit, and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved. In addition, it may be configured to perform variable display using the decorative pattern display device 779 at the predetermined position without moving the movable body 710.

(34) In the above-described embodiment, in the above-described embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start prize winning device 632 occurs and when the game ball is distributed by the stage 625 (the lower middle start prize winning device 431). The movable body 710 is arranged at different positions (that is, the intermediate position and the irradiation position) depending on the possibility that the game ball may enter into the movable body 710. In any case, the movable body 710 is the same. It may be arranged at a position.

(35) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 779 is configured to include the plurality of light emitting units 779A arranged in the left-right direction, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display device 779 may be composed of one light emitting portion that includes a plurality of light emitting bodies and extends in the left-right direction. Alternatively, the decorative symbol display device 779 may have a configuration in which one or a plurality of light emitting units 779A are arranged in various modes. Note that it is preferable that at least a part of the plurality of light emitting portions 779A or one light emitting portion having a shape extending in the left-right direction is along the shape of the rolling surface of the stage 625 in a front view of the gaming machine.

(36) In the above-described embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, the decorative pattern Z is reduced and moved, but without reducing the decorative symbol Z. It may be configured to move.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position is located at an upper position where it does not overlap. The decorative pattern Z is displayed. It is not always necessary that the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position does not overlap the decorative pattern Z after the movement, and the movable body 710 may overlap the decorative pattern Z.

(37) In the above embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting prize device 632 occurs, the decorative symbol Z is reduced and moved, and the side where the upper middle starting prize device 632 is located ( That is, although the arrows 731 and 732 pointing upwards are displayed, if the character points upwards, various characters (for example, a hand pointing upwards and an eyeball pointing upwards) are displayed instead of the arrows 731 and 732. Can be adopted.

In the above embodiment, the arrows 731 and 732 indicating the upper left or the upper right are displayed, but if the arrow indicates the side (that is, the upper side) on which the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located, the arrow points directly above. It may be an arrow. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the arrows 731 and 732 are displayed on the left and right of the decorative pattern Z, but if the position can point to the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located, an appropriate position can be set. It can be adopted as the display position of the arrows 731 and 732.

(38) In the above-described embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 is generated, the decorative pattern Z of the reduced size is moved upward so that the decorative symbol display device 479 is moved downward. An area in which the decorative pattern Z is not displayed is formed, and the movable body 710 at the intermediate position is overlapped with the area. Instead of this, in such a case, an arrow or the like pointing to the side on which the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located may be displayed in the area where the decorative design Z is not displayed on the lower side of the decorative design display device 479.

(39) In the above embodiment, the content of the character 779B is information that can be notified that it is a big hit, but the content of the character 779B can be notified of a particular advantageous result of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. The content may be other than the big hit as long as the content is proper.

(40) In the above-described embodiment, the character "779" of "corresponding to" is adopted as the information capable of notifying that it is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this and any character capable of notifying that it is a big hit can be used. For example, various characters can be adopted as the character 779B. For example, the character 779B can employ a character such as "V" as the character 779B. The information such as “win” that can be notified of a big hit may be information that is planarly attached to the surface of the light emitting unit 779A by printing or may be formed by undulations on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A. It may be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the character 779B fixedly formed on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A is used as the information capable of notifying that it is a big hit, but the color of the light emitting unit 779A (for example, the color of the cover or the light emitting color). ) May be information that can inform that the jackpot is a big hit. In such a modified example, for example, a color filter is arranged in front of the light emitting unit 779A and the light emitting unit 779A is visually recognized through the color filter, so that the player can visually recognize the content as not showing the big hit.

(41) In the above embodiment, the entrance 626 or the outlet 627 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, and the periphery of the entrance 626 or the outlet 627 is made into an opaque region, so that the entrance 626 or the outlet 627 is inserted. Only the part of the character 779B is visually recognized, and thus the content of the character 779B is visually recognized as the content which is not originally the content of the character 779B (that is, the content indicating that it is a big hit). The configuration is not limited to the configuration illustrated in the above embodiment as long as the content of the character 779B can be visually recognized as the content that the character 779B does not originally have. For example, by interposing a curved surface of the passage between the entrance 626 or the outlet 627 and the character 779B to be displayed, the content of the character 779B may be changed and visually recognized by refraction by the curved surface. ..

(42) In the above-described embodiment, when the movable body 710 is in the irradiation position, the content visually recognized through the entrance 626 is an arrow (that is, downward) that points to the side of the lower middle start winning device 431 (that is, downward). , “↓”), but when the movable body 710 is in the initial position, the content indicating whether it is an arrow pointing downward is not visually recognized through the discharge port 627. Even when the movable body 710 is at the initial position, it may be configured to have the content of an arrow pointing downward, as in the case where the movable body 710 is at the irradiation position.

(43) In the above embodiment, the inlet 626 and the outlet 627 are configured as windows for changing the content of the character 779B, but a dedicated window for changing the content of the character 779B may be provided.

(44) In the above embodiment, the time saving game state is described as ending when the preset upper limit number of games is reached, but the ending condition of the time saving game state is always satisfied by the number of games. Instead of or in addition to this, the time saving game state may be ended by the establishment of another predetermined ending condition. For example, a time saving game state in which an end lottery in which an end condition is satisfied with a predetermined end probability (for example, approximately 1/40) for each unit game is carried out for each change may be included, or The ending probability may be varied into a plurality of types, and may be configured to include a plurality of types of time saving game states having different advantageous degrees. Further, it may be configured to include a time saving game state of a type that continues until the next big hit lottery is won.

(45) In the above embodiment, the short-term time saving game state is set to one time saving time, but it is not always necessary to set the time saving time to one, and it may be set to two times or more. In this case, it is preferable that the number of times saved in the short-term saving game state is set such that a sufficient right to play a unit game is reserved before the start of the short-term saving game state. It is preferable to set it to ½ (for example, twice) or less, and it is preferable to set it once.

(46) In the above embodiment, the short-time short game state is set to a condition in which it is easy to make a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the starting winning of the first special symbol in the normal game state, and the special game state is set as this setting. I explained the configuration that the average value of the number of time saving in the time saving game state that transits after is set longer than the winning in the normal game state, but it is not always necessary to make this configuration, but transition to a game state advantageous for the player It is preferable to set other conditions that facilitate the operation. That is, instead of the configuration according to the above embodiment, or in addition to the configuration, a large number of balls to be awarded to the player may be set before returning to the normal game state by one big hit win, In the special game state, it may be set easily so that a big hit type with a large number of balls can be selected, or it may be set to change to the probability variation game state and easily set to a game state in which it is easy to win the big hit, or a normal game state. It is possible to set a combination of a plurality of the above-mentioned settings that are more advantageous to the player. If a plurality of game states can occur before returning to the normal game state, the number of balls to be acquired (expected number of balls to be acquired) as the expected value (average value) in the specifications is one time in the normal game state. It is preferable that one big jackpot win in at least one of the short-term short game state and the long-term short game state is set higher than the big hit.

(47) In the above embodiment, the time saving number of the time saving game state transiting after the special game state (specifically, the average number of times of one big hit winning that can be counted by the distribution probability of the big hit type) is set to the non-time saving state. It has been described that the setting is changed between the time saving state and the time saving state, and the setting is made different depending on the symbol type, but it is not always necessary to have this configuration, and at least one of the game state and the symbol type may be set in common, for example, It is also possible to eliminate the difference in the number of hours saved depending on the symbol type.

(48) In the above embodiment, the case where the first big hits 1 to 5 and the second big hits 1 and 2 are set as the big hit types has been described, but instead of at least a part of these, or at least these. In addition to a part, another jackpot type having a different number of balls to be acquired or a reduced number of hours saved may be included.

(49) In the above-described embodiment, there is a 100% probability that the winning related to the first special symbol in the short-term and short-time gaming state and the long-term shortening and shortening state, and the winning related to the second special symbol will cause a transition to the long-term short-time gaming state. However, it is not always necessary to transition to the long-term short game state with a probability of 100%, and as a part of those winnings, a configuration including a jackpot type that transitions to a game state other than the long-term short game state (for example, short-term short game state) Also good. In this case, it is preferable to set the condition in which the big hit type is selected in the time saving game state to be a condition in which it is easier for the player to make a transition to the game state, which is more advantageous than the condition in which the big hit type is selected in the normal game state. In addition, when comparing the condition that the big hit type is selected by the short-term short-time gaming state and the condition in the long-term short-time gaming state, the condition in the long-term short-time gaming state is a condition that makes it easier to transition to the advantageous gaming state. It is preferable.

(50) In the above-described embodiment, when performing a whale roulette variation effect using the common decorative symbol display device 779 as the variation effect during the short-time short game state related to the start winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, it is possible to execute a common variable effect while providing different decorative symbol display devices for each symbol type, and at least the variable display or the result display in the common decorative symbol display device. It is also possible to execute a variation effect having a different display mode.

(51) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which a total of two types of symbol types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set is explained, but a single symbol type as the symbol type (for example, only the first special symbol) ), or three or more types of symbols may be set. Further, the number of starting devices for generating the start winning in each symbol type may be set to either 1 or 2 or more. In this case, at least one of the starting devices is provided with an entry restricting mechanism and a driving means (for example, an entrance restricting solenoid or a motor) for differentiating the ease of entering the game ball between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. It is preferable that the state can be generated. For example, the right starting prize winning device 432 and the upper middle starting winning device 632 may be omitted, and only the lower middle starting winning device 431 may be configured. In this case, the lower middle starting winning device 431 is a game ball. An entry regulation mechanism and a drive means that make the entry different may be provided.

Alternatively, the right starting prize winning device 432 may be omitted, and an entry restricting mechanism and a driving means may be provided to make the game balls enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 differently. In this case, the game ball enters the passage 621 from the roof 611B as the first distribution unit as an entry restriction mechanism that makes the game ball enter the upper middle start winning device 632 differently. The size of the passage opening 621 can be switched to a plurality of stages so that the ease is different, and the time saving game state may be generated, or the entrance of the upper middle starting prize winning apparatus 632 or the entrance thereof. On the downstream side and on the upstream side of the second start winning award switch 642, another entrance (for example, a game ball passing on the inclined surface of the flow-down restricting portion 623 is provided) is provided, and the entrance The size may be switched to a plurality of stages so that a time saving game state may be generated.

(52) In the above embodiment, the case where the big hit lottery is performed with a winning probability of approximately 1/23 for the starting winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been described, but it is set to another winning probability. Alternatively, a different winning probability may be set for each symbol type. When a plurality of symbol types are set to win at the same probability, it is preferable that at least a part of the controls be shared, for example, a common counter used for lottery can be simplified. In this case, it is necessary to win the big hit lottery twice in succession for the start winning of the first special symbol as the probability of transitioning to the long-term and short-time gaming state, from the viewpoint of maintaining the player's willingness to continue the game. It is preferable to set the winning probability to a high probability, and it is also possible to set the winning probability to a probability higher than approximately 1/50, and it is more preferable to set the probability to be higher than approximately 1/30, and approximately 25/25. It is preferable to set the probability higher than 1.

In addition, as a display showing the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the plurality of light emitting units 779A is apparently corresponding to the high probability of winning. It is preferable that it is configured so that it is easy to win, and it is preferable that the number is less than the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is preferably 70% or less of the reciprocal of the winning probability, and preferably 50% or less. In addition, the number of the plurality of light emitting units 779A is preferably configured so as not to significantly differ from the winning probability in appearance, and is preferably less than the reciprocal of the winning probability, but approximately 20% or more, which is the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is preferably 30% or more, and more preferably 40% or more. In the above embodiment, 11 cases corresponding to about 48% of about 23 corresponding to the reciprocal of the winning probability of about 1/23 are illustrated.

(53) In the above embodiment, the maximum allowable number of game balls to enter the right start winning device 432 in the time saving state is set to the same number as the number of time saving in the short time saving game state, but it is set to be larger than the number of time saving. It is good, and when the number of times saved in the short-term time saving game state is two or more, it is preferable to set the number of times shorter than the times saved. In this case, by controlling the time saving state in the main control board 920, it is possible to make the maximum admissible number equal to the time saving number in the short time saving game state or a number smaller than the time saving number in the short time saving game state. It is preferable because it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the game ball enters the device 432 more than the number of times saved.

(54) In the above-described embodiment, when the start switch 446 detects the entry of the maximum allowable entry number of game balls after the right start winning device 432 has changed to the entry allowance position, the entry start position is changed to the entry prohibition position. I explained the configuration that refuses the entry of the game ball, instead of this, when you win the normal symbol lottery, the same number of game balls as the number of times saved in the short-term time saving game state (for example, one) It is supported by the entrance portion of the right start winning device 432 by the right approach restriction mechanism 452, and the following game ball is configured to be guided to the other direction by abutting the supported game ball, and the maximum allowable time for entry. When the time elapses, the right start winning a prize device 432 may take a prohibition posture, and only the supported number of game balls can enter the right starting award winning device 432.

(55) In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the time saving game state is entered, the time saving state flag is turned off and the change start setting is set as the timing for changing the control of the main control board 920 for the right start winning device 432. Although the timing immediately after the change has been described as an example, the change timing may be another timing, before the fluctuation start, or after a certain time has elapsed after the fluctuation start (for example, 0.5 seconds). Later) is also good. In this case, even before the variable display of the number of times the maximum number of games has been reached in the time saving game state, even if the time saving state flag is turned off when the start winning for the execution of the unit game of the relevant time occurs. Well, by doing so, it is possible to make the start winning of the second special symbol due to winning in the right starting winning device 432 easily match the upper limit number of games.

(56) In the above embodiment, as the operation notification control, the configuration in which the device provided in the pachinko machine 100 is used to output the information that can be identified by the player's sense has been described, but instead of this, or In addition, the left-sided information output, right-sided information output, and emission-free information output are supported by an external output terminal capable of outputting information to a device such as a hall computer connected to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. It may be configured to output different information to the outside.

(57) In the above embodiment, as the operation notification, three types of left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and firing unnecessary information output are set, but at least a part of them is omitted. Alternatively, another type of information output such as information output corresponding to a game technique that is good for either the left-handed game or the right-handed game may be added.

(58) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which once a big hit occurs, the expected big hit value is increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times) including the big hit. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine which is in a special game state on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after a big hit symbol is displayed. Alternatively, it may be implemented in an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various kinds of game machines such as arrangement ball type pachinko machines and sparrow balls may be implemented. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like. The meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Characteristic 10>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down through a predetermined entrance,
The game ball flowing down the game area has an entrance (passage opening 621) into which the game ball can flow, and the game ball flowing down the game area is a side closer to the entrance of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine. Side, or a distribution unit (roof 611B) that distributes to the second side which is the side far from the entrance of the game area in front view of the gaming machine,
The game balls distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit (from the left side to the central structure 420 to the downstream side). A first path (right downflow passage 653, downflow restricting portion 623) for guiding to the lower middle start winning device 431 on the left side game area),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. It is known that when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings.

In such a conventional game machine, in order to improve the interest of the game by the game ball flowing down the game area, various measures have been taken regarding the moving path of the game ball. For example, there is a gaming machine that structurally changes the moving path of the game ball by providing a distribution unit that distributes the game ball to the left and right at the upper part of the central structure arranged in the center of the game board (for example, (See JP 2004-254955 A).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional game machine, although the movement path of the game ball is diversified, the game ball distributed to the right flows down the right side as it is, and the behavior of the game ball distributed by the distribution unit goes to the downstream side. It also affects the position where the game balls flow down. Therefore, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and the player's firing operation is likely to be limited so that a large number of game balls flow down on one side where the privilege relating to the game is easily given, I wasn't surprised.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 10, the game balls structurally distributed by the distribution unit can be moved on a moving route suitable for improving the interest of the game. That is, since the game balls distributed by the distribution unit to the side farther from the entrance of the game area (second side) can be moved to the side closer to the entrance of the game area (first side), the player The target position is diversified by the firing operation, and it is possible to give unexpectedness. In addition, since the game ball can be returned to the first side even if a shooting operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the second side, the player can enter the entry part from the first side. Not only aiming at, but also allowing many game balls to flow down from the second side to enter the entrance part, it is possible to give a privilege for a game in a specific game area. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

The "first side" and the "second side" in the feature 10 change depending on the side of the gaming machine on which the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side of the game area is the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side of the game area corresponds to the "second side".

Similarly, the "specific game area" in the characteristic 10 also changes according to the side of the gaming machine on which the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area, the "specific game area" is a game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, a left side game area). Area).

<Characteristic 11>
A gaming machine according to feature 10,
The game ball provided with a second path (left downflow passage 652, downflow restricting portion 623) for guiding the game ball distributed to the first side by the distribution unit to the specific game area. Machine.

In recent years, due to an increase in the size of the central structure, there is a tendency that the size and arrangement of the region in which the game balls flow down in the game region are limited. On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in Feature 11, both the game balls assigned to the first side and the game balls assigned to the second side by the sorting unit have a common game area (sorting). Since it is possible to guide to a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the part, it is possible to effectively utilize a limited game area.

<Characteristic 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11,
On the downstream side of the specific game area, there is provided a first advantageous area (lower middle start winning device 431) that is an area that gives an advantage when compared with the case where it does not pass. A gaming machine characterized by.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 12, even if the game balls are distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, the game balls are separated from the distribution unit on the side different from the second side. In the game area (specific game area) formed on the 1 side), it becomes possible to pass the first advantageous area arranged on the downstream side of the specific game area. Therefore, a player may have a game ball game ball that passes through the first advantageous region with respect to a game ball that is distributed to a side different from the side where the first advantageous region is provided by the distribution unit. You can have the hope that you will not. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved more suitably.

Note that the characteristic 12, “advantageous advantages in the case of passing, compared with the case of not passing” is exemplified by various lottery rights given on the basis of passing and a game value such as a prize ball. .. The right of various lottery given based on passing is, for example, the right of the first special symbol lottery given based on passing (entry) to the lower middle starting winning device 431.

<Characteristic 13>
A gaming machine according to feature 12,
The distribution section is a second advantageous area (upper side) which is an area through which the game ball entered by the entrance section can pass and which gives an advantageous privilege in the case of passing, as compared with the case of not passing. Equipped with a middle start winning device 632),
The first route guides the game ball to the specific game area when the game ball is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit without entering the entry unit. A gaming machine to do.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 13, when the game ball is shot from the second side so as to aim at entering the entry part, the game ball does not enter the entry part and passes to the second advantageous area. Even if the opportunity is lost, the game balls are distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, so that the possibility of passing to the first advantageous area occurs. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the loss of the opportunity to enter the second advantageous area, and in that respect as well, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic 14>
A gaming machine according to feature 13,
A third game ball that has passed through the entry portion passes through the second side from the position of the second advantageous region without passing through the second advantageous region, and joins the first route. A game machine having a path (recess 622D, recess 622F).

With the gaming machine according to feature 14, even if the game ball has entered the entry portion but has not passed the second advantageous area, the game ball passes through the third route. And join the first route. Thereby, the player can expect that the game ball may pass the first advantageous area even if the game ball cannot be passed to the second advantageous area.

In particular, since the third route is a route that passes through the second side from the position of the second advantageous region and joins the first route, the player has an unexpectedness with respect to the movement route of the game ball. At the same time, it is possible to hold the expectation that the game ball may move through the first advantageous area with respect to the game ball moving by the unexpected route. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved more suitably.

Further, in the conventional typical gaming machine, when the gaming ball that has entered the entry portion does not pass through the advantageous area such as the second advantageous area, the gaming ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. .. On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 14, even if the gaming ball that has entered the entry portion does not pass through the second advantageous area, the gaming ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Without a second chance to pass to the first advantage area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the fact that the game ball that has entered the entry portion has not passed through the second advantageous area, and in that respect as well, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic 15>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 12 to 14,
The distribution unit is provided at a position where at least a part of the distribution unit vertically overlaps the first advantageous region in a front view of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine, wherein the first route is provided between the distribution unit and the first advantageous region.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 15, the game balls distributed to the second side by the distribution unit are moved to the first route and guided to the specific game area, and then to the first advantageous area. The route up to the point can be a route having a substantially S shape or the like. Therefore, the player has a movement route until the game balls distributed to the second side by the distribution unit reach the first advantageous area, which is completely different from the simply flowing-down route. You can clearly recognize the travel route. Thereby, even if the player shoots a game ball aiming at a side away from a specific game area, the player clearly understands that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous area. The operation can be performed.

<Characteristic 16>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 13 to 15,
A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advantageous game state when a game ball passes through at least one of the first advantageous region or the second advantageous region,
A gaming machine comprising a display device for displaying the identification information according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means between the distribution unit and the first advantageous area in a front view of the gaming machine. ..

In the gaming machine described in Feature 16, since the display device is provided between the distribution unit and the first advantageous area in the front view of the gaming machine, the player can set the game ball to the second ball by the distribution unit. When the game ball passes through the first advantageous region while following the movement route of the game ball when the game ball is distributed to the side, by raising the line of sight from the position of the first advantageous region, The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed the first advantageous area can be visually recognized. After confirming the state of the display device, the player can visually recognize how the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit located above the display device by further raising the line of sight. It is possible to prevent the eyes of the person from being scattered around.

<Characteristic 20>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down through a predetermined entrance,
Receiving the game ball, the first side, which is the side closer to the entrance of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine, or the position where the game ball is received, is far from the entrance of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine. It is provided with a flow-down restriction unit (flow-down restriction unit 623) that moves to the second side, which is the side, and guides it to a specific game area (left-side game area including the general winning device 639).
The specific game area includes an advantageous area (general winning device 639) that gives an advantageous privilege when passing, as compared with when not passing,
The flow-down restriction unit is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down restriction unit to the specific game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received.
The advantageous region is provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow-down restricting portion.

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. It is known that when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings.

In such a conventional game machine, in order to improve the interest of the game by the game ball flowing down the game area, various measures have been taken regarding the moving path of the game ball. For example, there is a gaming machine that structurally changes the moving path of the game ball by providing a distribution unit that distributes the game ball to the left and right at the upper part of the central structure arranged in the center of the game board (for example, (See JP 2004-254955 A).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, although the moving path of the game ball is diversified, the moving path is merely for changing the moving direction, and the game when the game ball is discharged from the moving path is changed. The behavior of the sphere was not considered. Further, the entry of the game ball into the advantageous area is easily determined by the arrangement of the downflow changing members such as nails provided in the vicinity of the advantageous area, and the behavior of the game ball at a position away from the advantageous area affects the entry into the advantageous area. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is less interested in the behavior of the game ball in a part of the game area.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in Feature 20, the flow-down restricting portion is a side closer to the entrance of the game area (first side) or a side farther from the entrance of the game area from the position where the game ball is received. Move to (second side) and guide to a specific game area. The flow-down restricting unit is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down restricting unit to the specific game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received. Then, in a specific game area, an advantageous area that gives an advantageous privilege when passing does not exist at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the downflow restriction unit. It is provided. Thereby, the possibility that the player can receive an advantageous privilege can be changed according to the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulation unit. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in which the game ball is moved in the flow-down regulation unit, and the interest of the game can be improved appropriately.

The "first side" and the "second side" in the feature 20 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side of the game area is the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side of the game area corresponds to the "second side".

<Characteristic 21>
A gaming machine according to feature 20,
The game machine is characterized in that the flow-down restricting portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines downward from one of the first side and the second side toward the other.

In the case of the gaming machine described in Feature 21, since the flow-down restricting portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines from one side to the other, the potential energy of the game ball rolling on the flow-down restricting portion by its own weight is the exit. The farther away it is, the higher it is. Thereby, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down restricting portion to the specific game area can be made different.

It should be noted that the “advantageous advantage in the case of passing the character compared to the case of not passing” in the feature 21 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on the passing and giving of a game value such as a prize ball. .. The awarding of a game value such as a prize ball, which is given based on the passing, is, for example, a prize ball which is given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Characteristic 22>
A gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21,
A game ball having a game ball flowing down the game area, and a distribution unit for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to the first side or the second side,
The flow-down restricting unit is provided below the distributing unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, receives the game ball distributed to the first side or the second side by the distributing unit, and receives the game ball. A game machine, which guides the player to the specific game area.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 22, the game balls distributed by the distribution unit can be discharged to a specific game area via the flow-down restriction unit.

<Characteristic 23>
A gaming machine according to feature 22,
The flow-down restricting portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines downward from the second side toward the first side,
The specific game area is an area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit (a left-side game area including a lower middle start winning device 431 on the downstream side from the left side with respect to the central structure body 420). And
The flow-down restricting portion receives the game balls distributed to the second side by the distributing portion on the second side from the center of the inclined portion, and moves to the first side by the distributing portion. A gaming machine characterized by receiving the allocated game balls on the first side from the center of the inclined portion.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 23, even if the game ball is distributed to the side farther from the entrance of the game area (second side) by the distribution unit, the game ball is distributed by the flow-down restriction unit. It is possible to obtain the possibility of passing to the advantageous area provided in the game area (specific game area) formed on the side closer to the entrance (first side) with respect to the division part. Therefore, since the player can diversify the target position by the shooting operation, the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit can be suitably improved.

Further, depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the first side or the second side by the distribution unit, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the downflow restriction unit to the specific game area can be changed. it can. That is, depending on the position where the advantageous area is provided, there is a possibility that the player can obtain an advantageous privilege depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the first side or the second side. Can be changed. Also in this respect, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit.

It should be noted that the "specific game area" in the feature 23 changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area, the "specific game area" is a game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, a left side game area). Area).

<Characteristic 24>
A gaming machine according to Feature 23,
The advantageous region is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit when the distribution unit receives the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided at a position where the possibility of passing is higher than when a game ball is received.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 24, the player can increase the possibility of passing to the advantageous area by performing a shooting operation aiming at a position so that the player can distribute the game machine to the second side by the distribution unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in shooting a game ball aiming at a predetermined position.

<Characteristic 30>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down through a predetermined entrance,
A decorative portion (decorative body 612A, 613A) which is configured to be visible on the back side and which is decorated by emitting light,
A game ball passage (left downflow passage 652, right downflow passage 653) formed on the back side of the decorative portion,
In the game ball passage, at least one passage display portion (projection portions 612D, 613D) extending along the continuous direction of the game ball passage,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. It is known that when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings.

In such a conventional game machine, in order to improve the interest of the game by the game ball flowing down the game area, various measures have been taken regarding the moving path of the game ball. For example, a warp path for guiding the game ball from the outside to the inside of the central structure arranged in the center of the game board is provided, and using the warp path, the game ball is guided to a stage that can be guided to the starter. Machine exists (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-254955).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, since the warp path is provided inside or on the back side of the central structure, it is difficult to visually recognize it from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the game ball enters the warp route, the player loses sight of the game ball and cannot confirm its whereabouts. Therefore, the player may not be able to enjoy the game even for a temporary period because he/she feels distrust that the game ball may not come out of the warp route and is frustrated by the fact that he cannot confirm the game ball.

For such a problem, it is conceivable to make the central structure transparent to make the warp passage visible. However, in recent years, a gaming machine that decorates the central structure by causing a light emitting body provided therein to emit light has become mainstream. Therefore, even if the central structure is made transparent, the player easily loses sight of the position of the warp path due to the light that decorates the central structure, and accordingly, the game balls passing through the warp path are also likely to lose sight. The issue of remains unsolved.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine 30, since the passage display portion extending along the continuous direction of the gaming ball passage is provided in the gaming ball passage formed on the back side of the decoration portion. The player can easily understand the game ball passage before the start of the game even if the decoration portion emits light for decoration. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust of the game ball that has entered the game ball passage, the player can enjoy the game started by entering the game ball into the game ball passage. .. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic 31>
A game machine according to feature 30,
A plurality of the passage display portions are arranged in a direction intersecting with the continuous direction of the game ball passage.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 31, since a plurality of passage display portions are arranged side by side in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the game ball passage, the player can use the plurality of passage display portions to play the game balls. It is easier to understand the passage.

<Characteristic 32>
A gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31,
The decorative portion is a decorative undulating surface formed on the front side of the decorative portion and a streak-shaped projection portion (projection portion 612D, which is formed on the back side of the decorative portion and extends along the continuous direction of the game ball passage. 613D) and
The amusement machine, wherein the passage display section is composed of the streak-like projections.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 32, the decorative undulating surface formed on the front side of the decorative portion provides a high degree of decorativeness, while the projection formed on the back side provides good visibility of the game ball passage. Can be secured. That is, it is possible to achieve both the decorativeness and the good visibility of the game ball passage.

<Characteristic 33>
A gaming machine described in feature 32,
The game ball passage is a passage that is configured to include a back surface of the decorative portion and a passage surface that faces the back surface, and that extends in the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
A game machine characterized in that the passage surface has a recessed portion corresponding to the protrusion at the position where the streak-shaped protrusion is formed.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 33, the passage formed between the protrusion and the recess allows the passage path of the game ball passage to be configured as a meandering path along the recess instead of a vertical drop. In such a meandering portion, the speed of the game ball passing through the game ball passage can be reduced.

<Characteristic 34>
A gaming machine described in the feature 33,
The gaming machine, wherein the streak-like protrusion is formed such that the height from the installation surface of the ornamental portion gradually increases from the end of the protrusion toward the inside.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 34, the meandering portion formed by the protrusion and the recess in the game ball passage can be made gentle, so that the game ball is meandered in the passage to cause the game ball in the passage. It can suppress clogging.

<Characteristic 35>
A gaming machine according to feature 33 or 34,
A gaming machine characterized in that a length of each of the sections extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage divided by the projecting portion in a direction intersecting the continuous direction is narrower than a width of the game ball.

In the gaming machine described in the characteristic 35, since the length of each section, which is divided by the protrusion and extends in the continuous direction of the game ball passage, intersects the continuous direction is narrower than the width of the game ball. , The game ball can be passed along each section extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage. As a result, the game balls passing through the game ball passage are rectified, so that the passage can be suppressed from being clogged with the game balls.

<Characteristic 36>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 30 to 35,
The game ball flowing down the game area has an entrance (passage opening 621) into which the game ball can flow, and the game ball flowing down the game area is a side closer to the entrance of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine. , Or a distribution unit (roof 611B) that distributes to the second side, which is the side far from the entrance of the game area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage of the gaming balls sorted by the sorting unit.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 36, the gaming balls sorted by the sorting unit can be introduced into the gaming ball passage. The player can grasp the whereabouts of the game balls after being sorted by the sorting unit by using the passage display unit.

The "first side" and the "second side" in the feature 36 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side of the game area is the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side of the game area corresponds to the "second side".

<Characteristic 37>
A gaming machine described in feature 36,
The game ball is provided on the downstream side of the game ball passage for passing the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, and the game ball is viewed from the second side to the first side in a game machine front view. By moving toward a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit (including the lower middle start winning device 431 from the left side to the central structure 420 on the downstream side). A gaming machine comprising a flow-down regulation part (flow-down regulation part 623) for guiding to the left game area.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine 37, the game balls distributed to the side (second side) far from the entrance of the game area by the distribution unit pass through the game ball passage and the flow-down restricting unit, and enter the game area. The player is guided to a specific game area formed on the side closer to the entrance (first side). In such a case, the game balls will pass through a relatively long route until they enter the specific game area after being sorted by the sorting unit. As described above, it is easy to understand the game ball passage before the game starts (that is, before the game ball enters a specific game area). As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust of the game ball that has entered a relatively long path including the game ball passage until reaching a specific game area.

It should be noted that the “specific game area” in the feature 37 changes depending on the side of the gaming machine on which the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area, the "specific game area" is a game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, a left side game area). Area).

<Characteristic 38>
A gaming machine according to feature 37,
The flow-down restricting portion is configured as an inclined portion that descends and inclines from the second side toward the first side, receives a game ball that has passed through the game ball passage, and receives the game ball. From there, there is one that moves to the first side and guides to the specific game area,
The specific game area is provided with an advantageous area (lower middle starting prize device 431) that gives an advantageous privilege when passing, compared to when not passing,
The flow-down restricting unit is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down restricting unit is different depending on the position where the game ball is received.
The advantageous region is provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow-down restricting portion.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 38, the downflow restricting portion receives the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage, and the side closer to the entrance of the game area from the position where the game ball is received (the first side). ) To guide to a specific game area. The flow-down restricting unit is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down restricting unit to the specific game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received. Then, in a specific game area, an advantageous area that gives an advantageous privilege when passing does not exist at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the downflow restriction unit. It is provided. In this way, the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage changes in the possibility that the player can receive an advantageous privilege, depending on the position of the flow-down regulation unit that has received the game ball. It is possible to enjoy a game in which the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage is moved by the flow-down restricting unit, and thereby, the interest of the game can be favorably improved.

It should be noted that examples of the feature 38 “advantageous advantages in the case of passing the passage compared to the case of not passing the passage” include various lottery rights given based on the passage and giving of a game value such as a prize ball. .. The awarding of a game value such as a prize ball, which is given based on the passing, is, for example, a prize ball which is given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Characteristic 40>
The game balls are distributed to a plurality of discharge points (recesses 625A to 625C) including at least a point where the first area (lower middle start winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing is located on the downstream side. Possible first distribution part (stage 625),
A plurality of discharge locations (recesses 622D to which the second area (upper middle starting prize winning apparatus 632) different from the first area, which is given a predetermined privilege in the game by passing, is located on the downstream side. 622F) can be distributed game balls, the second distribution unit (stage 622C) provided at a position different from the first distribution unit,
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit have rolling surfaces configured in a similar shape with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball.

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. It is known that when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings.

Some of the conventional game machines have two start openings to improve the interest of the game. Among such gaming machines, there is also a gaming machine that aims to further improve the interest by changing the probability of entering a ball for one of the two starting openings by utilizing distribution by stage. (For example, see JP-A-2005-173875).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, although the probability of entering the ball for one of the two starting openings can be changed by the distribution by the stage, the distribution contributes to the probability of entering the other starting opening. Not something to do. Therefore, the player cannot enjoy the playability of sorting by the stage for the starting openings other than the specific starting opening.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature 40, the first game ball can be distributed toward the first area, which is one of the areas to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing the first. A second sorting unit is provided which is provided with a sorting unit and which is capable of sorting the game balls toward a second region, which is another region to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing therethrough. I have it. Therefore, the player can enjoy the gaming property of the distribution by the first distribution unit or the second distribution unit for both the first region and the second region, respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit have rolling surfaces configured in a similar shape with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface is performed. The dynamic behavior is similar in both distribution parts. Therefore, the player can visually enjoy the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit as well.

Note that the "predetermined privilege in the game" in the characteristic 40 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on passing, a game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of a game value such as a prize ball, which is given based on the passing, is, for example, a prize ball which is given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Characteristic 41>
A gaming machine according to feature 40,
First display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying symbols that are variably displayed to display the lottery result,
A first route (left warp passage 628) from the side of the first display means to the first distribution unit;
Equipped with
Each rolling surface of the first distributing portion and the second distributing portion includes a surface formed of a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface and formed substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction in a gaming machine front view,
The first distribution unit is provided below the first display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The game machine, wherein the second distribution unit is provided above the first display means in a front view of the game machine.

In the gaming machine described in Feature 41, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include a surface formed of a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface and formed substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the game machine. Since it has a moving surface, the shape of these distribution portions extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine. In a typical gaming machine, the first display means is configured such that the length in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is longer than the length in the up-down direction and is provided near the center of the game area. By providing the first allocating portion and the second allocating portion having a shape extending in the vertical direction above and below through the first display means, it is preferable to provide a game area for flowing down the game balls in the lateral direction of the first display means. It can be secured in any size.

At this time, since the first path from the side of the first display means to the first distribution portion is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area provided in the left-right direction with respect to the first display means, It is possible to guide the vehicle to the first sorting section provided below the first display means via one route. Therefore, the game area around the first display means can be effectively utilized.

<Characteristic 42>
A gaming machine described in feature 41,
If the game ball discharged from any one of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second area, the second route that can guide the game ball to the first distribution unit A gaming machine having (flow-down restriction unit 623, left-side game area).

With the gaming machine according to feature 42, even if the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge locations in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second area, Since there is a second route that can be guided to one distribution unit, the player is given another chance to obtain a predetermined privilege. Therefore, even if the predetermined privilege cannot be obtained as a result of the distribution by the second distribution unit, the player's disappointment due to it can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the game balls distributed by the second distribution unit are guided to the first distribution unit through the second route, the player is the same as the previous second distribution unit in the first distribution unit. You will see how the game balls are distributed by the rolling behavior of. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make the player feel that another chance to obtain the predetermined privilege has been obtained, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The “second route” in the feature 42 may include the “first route” or may not include the “first route”.

<Characteristic 43>
A gaming machine described in feature 42,
A game area where the game balls flow through a predetermined entrance,
A first side which is a side close to the entrance of the game area in a front view of the game machine, which has an entry portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, or a game ball flowing down the game area. In a front view of the gaming machine, a third distribution unit (roof 611B) that distributes to a second side that is far from the entrance of the game area,
A third path (flow-down restriction unit) that guides the game balls distributed to the second side by the third distribution unit to a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit. 623),
Equipped with
The second distribution unit distributes the game balls that have entered from the entrance unit,
When the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second area, the game ball joins the third path,
The second path includes the third path that passes after the merging, the gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 43, even when the game ball has entered the entry part, the game ball has not passed through the second area as a result of the allocation by the second distribution part. Also, by joining the third route, the player is given another chance to obtain a predetermined privilege. As a result, even if the predetermined privilege cannot be obtained as a result of the distribution by the second distribution unit, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment.

Further, in the conventional game machine, there is one that structurally changes the movement path of the game ball by providing a distribution unit that distributes the game ball to the left and right at the upper part of the central structure arranged in the center of the game board. Exist (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-254955). However, in the conventional game machine, although the movement path of the game ball is diversified, the game ball distributed to the right flows down the right side as it is. It also affects the position where the game ball flows into. Therefore, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and the player's firing operation is likely to be limited so that a large number of game balls flow down on one side where the privilege relating to the game is easily given, I wasn't surprised.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in Feature 43, by providing the third route, the game balls structurally distributed by the third distribution unit can be used as a moving route suitable for improving the interest of the game. Can be moved. That is, since the game balls distributed to the side farther from the entrance of the game area (second side) by the third distribution unit can be moved to the side closer to the entrance of the game area (first side), The player can diversify the target position by the shooting operation, and can give a surprise. In addition, since the game ball can be returned to the first side even if a shooting operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the second side, the player can enter the entry part from the first side. Not only aiming at, but also allowing many game balls to flow down from the second side to enter the entrance part, it is possible to give a privilege for a game in a specific game area. Therefore, also in that respect, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

The "first side" and the "second side" in the feature 43 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side of the game area is the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side of the game area corresponds to the "second side".

Similarly, the "specific game area" in the feature 43 also changes according to the side of the gaming machine on which the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area, the "specific game area" is a game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, a left side game area). Area).

<Characteristic 45>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 40 to 44,
The first distribution portion and the second distribution portion include a surface formed of a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface as the rolling surface,
The plurality of discharge points in the first distribution section and the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution section are provided at positions corresponding to each other on the rolling surface,
At least one of the plurality of discharge locations in the first distribution unit has a discharge direction different from that of a corresponding discharge location in the second distribution unit.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 45, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit have at least one corresponding discharge at at least one location while the rolling behavior of the game ball on the rolling surface is similar. Since the discharge direction is different in each place, the player can intuitively distinguish the difference between the distribution units by the difference in the discharge direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid a monotonous game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game balls between the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

<Characteristic 46>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 40 to 45,
The first distributing portion and the second distributing portion include two concave surfaces and a convex surface located between the concave surfaces as the rolling surface,
The first region is a region fixedly provided at a position through which a game ball discharged from one or a plurality of specific discharge positions can pass among the plurality of discharge positions in the second distribution unit. ,
The second region is a region provided so as to be movable within a range in which game balls discharged from one or a plurality of specific discharge positions of the plurality of discharge positions in the second distribution unit can pass. A gaming machine characterized by being.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 46, the second region is provided so as to be movable within a range in which the game balls discharged from the specific discharge points out of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit can pass. Since it is a region, the probability that a game ball discharged from a specific discharge point will pass through the second region is fixed at a position where the game ball discharged from a specific discharge point can pass through. It will be lower than if it was given. Therefore, the expectation for passing the first area or the second area can be made different depending on whether the game ball enters the first distribution unit or the second distribution unit. As a result, it is possible to avoid a monotonous game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game balls between the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

<Characteristic 47>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 40 to 46,
The value that can be expected from the respective benefits is different between the privilege granted when the game ball passes through the second area and the privilege granted when the game ball passes through the first area. Characteristic gaming machine.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 47, the expectation for the value can be made different depending on whether the game ball passes through the first region and when the game ball passes through the second region. It is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

<Characteristic 50>
First display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying symbols that are variably displayed to display the lottery result,
A symbol moving means (sub-control board 940) for moving the symbol displayed on the screen in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing,
A second area (an upper middle start), which is an area different from the first area and configured to have a lower possibility of passing than the first area, in which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing. Winning device 632),
Equipped with
The operating condition is established based on the possibility that the game ball may pass to the second area,
The predetermined direction according to the operating condition is a direction indicating the side of the second region, the gaming machine.

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. It is known that when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings. Some of the conventional game machines have two start openings to improve the interest of the game (see, for example, JP-A-2015-173875).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional typical gaming machine, since the two starting ports are provided at positions vertically close to each other, the line of sight of the player chasing the flow-down behavior of the gaming ball while hoping to enter the starting port. Is limited to a relatively narrow range, and the player may feel monotonous about the game. In order to solve this problem, it is conceivable to provide the two starting ports at positions distant from each other, but since the points of interest are separated, the player's consciousness is likely to be biased toward one of the starting ports. There is a possibility of missing the ball entering the other starting port. The entry into the starting opening is an event that triggers the lottery, and is one of the events that give the player an interest. Therefore, the player loses one opportunity to get entertaining by missing the ball entering the starting opening.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in Feature 50, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second area, it is displayed on the screen of the first display means. The symbol is moved in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition. Therefore, the player can recognize from the movement of the symbol and the moving direction thereof that a predetermined operating condition, that is, the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region has occurred. This makes it difficult for the player to overlook the passage of the game ball in the second area, and can appropriately obtain the interest of the game ball passing through the second area.

In particular, the symbol that is variably displayed and displays the lottery result is one of the places where the player most easily tilts his/her consciousness, so the player can capture the movement of the symbol with high probability. Therefore, by moving such a symbol, it is possible to appropriately let the player recognize that the possibility of passing the game ball to the second area has occurred. Further, since the moving direction of the symbol due to the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region is the direction showing the second region side, the player moves the line of sight in accordance with the movement of the symbol. Thus, it is possible to naturally direct one's line of sight to the second area. Therefore, the player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second area with a suitable probability.

Here, since the second area has a lower possibility of passing than the first area, the player's expectation of passing is higher than that of the first area. In addition, the second area, which has a lower possibility of passing than the first area, is an area in which the player can easily take his eyes off compared to the first area. On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 50, it is possible to cause the player to witness the passage of the game ball in the second region with a suitable probability, and thus to provide the player with a more interesting interest.

The "predetermined privilege in the game" in the feature 50 is exemplified by various lottery rights given on the basis of passing and a game value such as a prize ball. The awarding of a game value such as a prize ball, which is given based on the passing, is, for example, a prize ball which is given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Characteristic 51>
A gaming machine described in the gaming machine 50,
The first region is provided below the first display means in a front view of the gaming machine,
The game machine, wherein the second area is provided above the first display means in a front view of the game machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in feature 51, the first display means is interposed between the first area and the second area, so that the player's consciousness for the second area having a low possibility of passage easily weakens, It becomes easier to overlook the passage of the game ball in the two areas. However, even in such a second area, the possibility of passing the game ball is suggested by the fact that the symbol that the player is most likely to tilt is moving in the direction indicating the second area side. The player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second area with a suitable probability.

<Characteristic 52>
A gaming machine according to feature 50 or 51,
When a game ball passes through the first area, a lottery means (main control board 920) is provided for performing a predetermined lottery as the predetermined privilege.
The above-mentioned symbol is for displaying a lottery result by the lottery means, a gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the possibility of passing the game ball to the second area is generated by using the design for displaying the lottery result obtained when the game ball has passed the first area. Is suggested. Therefore, the player is given an expectation for passing the game ball to the second area, together with an expectation for the result of the lottery performed by the passing of the game ball through the first area that has nothing to do with the second area. You can

<Characteristic 53>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 52,
The value that can be expected by the privilege given by the game ball passing through the second area is higher than the value that can be expected by the privilege given by the game ball passing through the first area. Characteristic gaming machine.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 53, the player can easily see the passing of the game ball to the second area, which can be expected to be more valuable than the first area. Can be provided.

<Characteristic 54>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 53,
A game machine comprising a symbol reduction means (sub-control board 940) for reducing the symbol displayed on the screen when the operating condition is satisfied.

In the case of the gaming machine 54, the symbol is reduced when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied because the possibility of passing the game ball to the second area occurs, so the symbol on the screen is moved after the symbol moves. The non-display area is formed with a certain size. Therefore, using the non-display area, another method of moving the design (for example, moving the movable body on the non-display area, displaying a character different from the design, etc.), the second area It is possible to indicate to the player that the possibility of passing the game ball to the player has occurred.

<Characteristic 55>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 54,
A movable body (movable body 710) movable in a predetermined direction within a range including at least a position overlapping the screen of the first display means;
Movable body moving means (sub-control board 940) for moving the movable body in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means when the operating condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 55, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second area, the movable body is moved in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition (that is, , The direction indicating the second area side), the player determines the position of the second area and the possibility of the game ball passing through the second area from the movement of the movable body and its moving direction. Can recognize the occurrence of. Particularly, since the movable body is moved at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means, the player can visually recognize the movement of the movable body at the same time while observing the movement of the symbol, and thus the game ball to the second area. It is possible to more appropriately recognize that the possibility of passage has occurred.

<Characteristic 56>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 55,
A second distribution unit (stage 622C) that distributes the game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the second region is located on the downstream side,
Detection means (contact sensor 662) for detecting a game ball entering the second distribution unit,
Equipped with
A gaming machine, wherein a possibility of passing a game ball to the second area is generated when a game ball entering the second distribution unit is detected by the detection means.

With the gaming machine according to feature 56, when the detection means detects the game ball entering the second distribution unit, the movable body is moved as the possibility of the game ball passing through the second area is generated. As a result, the player can pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the second distribution unit. This allows the player to enjoy the game in which the game balls are distributed by the second distribution unit.

<Characteristic 57>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 50 to 56,
The screen of the first display means can display a character,
A game machine characterized by comprising character display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a character indicating a predetermined direction according to the operating condition when the operating condition is satisfied.

With the gaming machine described in the characteristic 57, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second area, the predetermined direction (that is, the second operating condition) is satisfied. Since a character indicating the direction indicating the area side) is displayed, the player determines, based on the displayed character, the position of the second area and the possibility of the game ball passing through the second area. Can be recognized.

<Characteristic 60>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the second predetermined condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied;
A movable body (movable body 710) movable in a predetermined direction,
A second light emitting section which is disposed on the front side of the game machine in the movable body and which is capable of displaying a variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means by emitting light in a predetermined manner in response to the establishment of the second predetermined condition. Display means (decorative pattern display device 779),
The movable body is located at a predetermined initial position, and when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs, the movable body moves from the initial position to one side in the predetermined direction to satisfy the second predetermined condition. According to the above, when the variable display is executed by the second display means, the gaming machine is located at the variable display position away from the initial position to one side in the predetermined direction.

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. A configuration is known in which, when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings (for example, see JP-A-2015-173875).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional typical gaming machine, the player's consciousness tends to be oriented toward the display device that displays the fluctuation display and the lottery result, and therefore the player may miss the ball entering the starting opening. It was The entry into the starting opening is an event that triggers the lottery, and is one of the events that give the player an interest. Therefore, the player loses one opportunity to get entertaining by missing the ball entering the starting opening.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 60, the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition that triggers the lottery by the lottery means occurs. Can recognize the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied from the moving direction of the movable body (that is, the predetermined direction). As a result, the player is unlikely to overlook the establishment of the second predetermined condition that triggers the lottery by the lottery means, and can enjoy the interest of the game in which the lottery is performed by the establishment of the second predetermined condition. In particular, when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs, the moving direction of the movable body is the direction in which the movable body moves from the initial position to the variable display position. You can intuitively recognize that it is related to the establishment of the condition.

Further, since the movable body provided with the second display means is diverted as a component indicating that the possibility of fulfilling the second predetermined condition has occurred, it is possible to confirm that the possibility of fulfilling the second predetermined condition has occurred. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated part for suggestion, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In the feature 60, the “second predetermined condition” and the “second display means” may be the “predetermined condition” and the “display means”, respectively.

<Characteristic 61>
In the gaming machine described in feature 60,
The game machine, wherein the movable body is positioned at an intermediate position closer to the initial position than the variable display position when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs.

In the case of the gaming machine described in feature 61, when the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied occurs, the movable body is located at an intermediate position between the initial position and the variable display position. According to the above, it is possible to make the player distinguish whether the movement of the movable body is performed due to the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied or whether the movement is performed for the variable display by the second display means. it can. Thereby, the player can preferably recognize that the possibility of establishing the second predetermined condition has occurred.

<Characteristic 62>
A gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61,
A second area (upper middle starting winning device 632) in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball passes is provided,
The game machine, wherein the second region is provided on one side in the predetermined direction with respect to the movable body.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 62, since the moving direction of the movable body is on the side of the area (second area) related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition, if the possibility of establishment of the second predetermined condition occurs. The player's line of sight can be naturally directed to the second region in accordance with the movement of the movable body. Thereby, the player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second area where the second predetermined condition is satisfied with a suitable probability.

<Characteristic 63>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 60 to 62,
The lottery means performs a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition is satisfied,
The first display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol for displaying a lottery result by the lottery means performed based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition,
The game machine, wherein the movable body is configured to be movable in a vertical direction when viewed from the front of the game machine, and overlaps the screen at least when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 63, the movable body moves at a position overlapping with the screen of the first display means at least when the possibility of establishing the second predetermined condition occurs. The screen of the first display means is a part where a symbol for displaying a lottery result based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is displayed, and is one of the parts where the player is most likely to incline. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the movable body that moves at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means, and thereby can appropriately recognize that the possibility of establishing the second predetermined condition has occurred.

<Characteristic 64>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 60 to 63,
A second area (upper middle starting winning device 632) in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied by the passage of the game ball,
A second distribution unit (stage 622C) that distributes the game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the second region is located on the downstream side,
Detection means (contact sensor 662) for detecting a game ball entering the second distribution unit,
Equipped with
A gaming machine, wherein a possibility of passing a game ball to the second area is generated when a game ball entering the second distribution unit is detected by the detection means.

In the case of the gaming machine described in feature 64, when the detection means detects the game ball entering the second distribution unit, the movable body is moved because the possibility of establishment of the second predetermined condition is generated, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the second distribution unit. This allows the player to enjoy the game in which the game balls are distributed by the second distribution unit.

<Characteristic 65>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 60 to 64,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) in which a first predetermined condition is established by passing a game ball,
A first distribution unit (stage 625) capable of distributing the game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the first region is located on the downstream side, provided in the movable range of the movable body,
Equipped with
The movable body is a position between the initial position and the variable display position when the game balls are distributed by the first distribution unit, and the second display means is the first distribution unit. Located at the irradiation position, which is the position that can illuminate the rolling surface of the game ball in
In the second display means, at least a part of the light emitting portion is arranged in a shape along the rolling surface of the first distributing portion,
The game machine characterized in that the second display means emits light when the movable body is located at the irradiation position regardless of whether the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine described in feature 65, when the game balls are distributed by the first distribution unit, the second display means of the movable body located at the irradiation position is irrelevant to the establishment of the second predetermined condition. It emits light. The irradiation position is a position between the initial position and the variable display position, and is a position where the second display means can illuminate the rolling surface of the game ball in the first distribution unit. Therefore, the game balls to be sorted by the first sorting unit roll on the rolling surface illuminated by the second display means. Particularly, in the second display means, at least a part of the light emitting portion is arranged in a shape along the rolling surface of the first distributing portion, so that the rolling surface of the first distributing portion can be efficiently arranged. Can be illuminated.

Here, since the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit is related to the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the player pays attention to the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit while expecting the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the second display means, the light illuminating the rolling surface functions as an effect that makes the player expect the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition. As a result, the player's expectation is fueled, and the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the first distribution unit can be suitably improved.

In the gaming machine according to feature 65, the second display means emits light in a mode different from a predetermined mode in which the movable body is positioned at the irradiation position and emits light according to the establishment of the second predetermined condition. It is preferable that the player can avoid an event that causes the player to misunderstand that the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic 70>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery according to the established condition when the second predetermined condition is established;
A movable body (movable body 710) movable in a predetermined direction,
A second light emitting section which is disposed on the front side of the game machine in the movable body and which is capable of displaying a variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means by emitting light in a predetermined manner in response to the establishment of the second predetermined condition. Display means (decorative pattern display device 779),
Equipped with
The movable body is located at a predetermined initial position, and is located at a variable display position different from the initial position when performing the variable display by the second display means in response to the establishment of the second predetermined condition. ,
The second display means includes a result display unit (character 779B) for notifying that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit).
When the movable body is located at a position different from the variable display position, display change means for visually recognizing the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit as content different from the content corresponding to the result ( A game machine having an entrance 626 and an outlet 627).

In a conventional typical game machine, a game ball shot in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting opening, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball. A configuration is known in which, when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning openings (for example, see JP-A-2015-173875).

However, in the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional game machine, the variable display and the lottery result are generally displayed on the screen of the display device, and in that respect, there is a limit to the fun that can be given to the player.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 70, the variable display and the lottery result based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition are displayed using the second display means provided on the movable body that can move in the predetermined direction. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a higher level of interest than the conventional general gaming machine. Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 70, when the movable body is located at a position different from the variable display position, the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display section of the second display means is It is visually recognized as a content different from the content corresponding to the result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the predetermined result has been obtained, even though the second display means is not in the situation of displaying the lottery result based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged unnecessarily due to the mistaken recognition of the lottery result, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to such false recognition.

In the feature 70, the “second predetermined condition” and the “second display means” may be the “predetermined condition” and the “display means”, respectively.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine described in feature 70,
The result display unit includes information corresponding to the predetermined result fixedly provided on the surface,
The display changing means is configured as a window portion (entrance opening 626, discharge opening 627) of a predetermined shape located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second display means, and the movable body displays the variation from the initial position. Corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the information formed on the result display unit by visually recognizing at least a part of the result display unit through the window when it is located at a predetermined position within the range up to the position A gaming machine, wherein the contents to be viewed are visually recognized as contents different from the contents corresponding to the predetermined result.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 71, by allowing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the result display unit through the window having the predetermined shape, the information fixedly formed on the surface of the result display unit can be displayed. The content (that is, the content corresponding to the predetermined result) can be visually recognized as the content different from the content corresponding to the predetermined result. Therefore, the erroneous recognition of the predetermined result indicated by the result display section of the second display means can be realized with a relatively simple configuration without changing the information on the result display section in a controllable manner.

In the feature 71, “fixedly provided on the surface” may be a surface that is flatly attached by printing or the like, or may be formed by undulations on the surface. Good.

<Feature 72>
A gaming machine described in feature 71,
The window is an opening on the front side of the gaming machine, which is connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.
The display changing unit visually recognizes at least a part of the result display unit from the front side of the opening in the front view of the gaming machine, thereby visually confirming the content corresponding to the predetermined result shown by the result display unit as different content. A gaming machine that is characterized by:

In the gaming machine described in the feature 72, the window is an opening on the front side of the gaming machine that is connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, so that the opening on the front side of the gaming machine in the passage of the gaming ball. Can be used as a window. Therefore, it is not necessary to exclusively provide the window portion functioning as the display changing unit, and thus it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost. Further, by visually recognizing at least a part of the result display section from the opening of the passage of the game ball, the player can be made aware of the passage.

<Feature 73>
A gaming machine described in feature 72,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing,
An entry portion (entrance 626) that is opened to the front side of the gaming machine and is connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front,
A discharge unit (discharge port 627) that is connected to the passage and discharges the game ball guided from the entrance through the passage to the upstream side of the first region,
A first distribution unit (stage 625) for distributing the game balls to the entrance portion or outside the entrance portion,
Equipped with
The game machine, wherein the window is the entrance.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 73, the window section is an entry section into which the game balls sorted by the first sorting section enter. Since the game ball that has entered the entry part is discharged from the discharge part to the upstream side of the first region, at least a part of the result display part is visually recognized at the entrance facing the front side of the gaming machine, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the superiority of entering the game ball into the entry portion.

Note that the “predetermined privilege in the game” in the feature 73 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on passing, a game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of a game value such as a prize ball, which is given based on the passing, is, for example, a prize ball which is given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 74>
A gaming machine described in feature 72,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing,
A discharge portion (discharge port 627) that is opened on the front side of the game machine and is connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when the game machine is viewed from the front and discharges the game ball passing through the passage to the upstream side of the first region.
An entrance (entrance 626) connected to the passage,
A first distribution unit (stage 625) for distributing the game balls to the entrance portion or outside the entrance portion,
Equipped with
The game machine characterized in that the window portion is the discharge portion.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 74, the window portion is a discharge portion that discharges the game balls distributed to the entry portion by the first distribution portion to the upstream side of the first area. Therefore, at least a part of the result display section is visually recognized in front of the game machine from the front side of the game machine, so that the player can pay attention to the superiority of discharging the game ball from the game machine. You can

The "predetermined privilege in the game" in the feature 74 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on the passing, a game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of a game value such as a prize ball, which is given based on the passing, is, for example, a prize ball which is given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Characteristic 75>
A gaming machine according to feature 73 or 74,
The display changing unit visually recognizes the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the information formed on the result display unit, not as the content corresponding to the result but as the content indicating the first region side. And a gaming machine.

With the gaming machine described in the characteristic 75, when the entry portion or the ejection portion of the first sorting portion is faced from the front side of the gaming machine, the content indicating the side of the first area is visually recognized ahead of it. Therefore, the player can associate the entry portion or the ejection portion with the first region based on the visually recognized contents, whereby the game ball that has entered the entry portion or the game ball that is ejected from the ejection portion. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player have an expectation about the privilege obtained by passing through the first area.

<Characteristic 80>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down through a predetermined entrance,
A lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (starting prize of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (starting prize of the second special symbol) is established.
When the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a variable display is performed, and after the variable display, a display device capable of displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery (special symbol display devices 471, 472). , Decorative pattern display devices 479, 779),
If another predetermined condition is satisfied while the variable display is being executed by the display device, the variable display is executed for a predetermined maximum number of times for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition (the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied). With respect to each of the establishment of (4) and a holding means (a part of the main control board 920) capable of holding up to 4 times,
A first starting portion (lower middle starting winning device 431) that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters
A second starting portion (right starting winning device 432) that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently, and satisfies the second predetermined condition when the game balls enter;
A variable winning portion (central prize winning device 434) that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player when the game balls enter.
Game state control means (one of the main control board 920) for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of a game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of a game ball in the variable winning portion. Section) and
As the game state,
A normal game state in which a game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting portion,
An easy prize winning game state (special game state) including a period that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state and the variable prize unit takes a state in which a game ball easily enters,
The result information corresponding to the non-win (miss) of the predetermined lottery is included, including one or more variable displays executed after the easy winning game state and a display of the result information after the one or more variable displays. In the case of a game state that transitions to another game state when displayed until reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games, and when the result information corresponding to the winning (big hit) of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information. The advantageous game state in which the game state to be transitioned after the result information is displayed is determined by the condition that the player is more likely to transit to the game state that is more advantageous than the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the normal game state is provided. ,
As the advantageous game state, a first advantageous game state (short-term short game state) and a second advantageous game state (long-term short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided.
The game state control means,
An entry normal control (control of the right start winning device 432 in the non-time saving state) that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and the normal game during the advantageous game state. In order to perform an easy-entry control (control of the right start winning device 432 in a time-saving state) capable of generating an easy-entry state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting portion from a state,
As the first winning type (big hit type related to the first special symbol) corresponding to the game state transitioned when the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined lottery is won,
A winning type (first big hit 2, 5) that transitions to the first advantageous game state according to the first selection condition (selection condition in the non-time saving state) corresponding to the normal gaming state,
The winning type (first big hit 1 to 5) that transitions to the second advantageous game state is provided by the second selection condition (selection condition in the time saving state) corresponding to the first advantageous game state,
As the second winning type (big hit type related to the second special symbol) corresponding to the game state transitioned when the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined lottery is won,
A gaming machine provided with a winning type (second big hit 1, 2) that transitions to the second advantageous game state in both the normal game state and the first advantageous game state.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game ball enters the starting opening as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by a lottery based on the entered ball, it becomes a special game state, and a large number of game balls can be won in the prize opening in the special game state. Is known. Also, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, a probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability of a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state, or a gaming state in which a game ball enters the starting opening more easily than the normal gaming state, etc. It is also known that a game is added to make the game diverse.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous game state depending on the result of the lottery performed by the entry of the game ball into the starting opening, so that the transition to the advantageous game state is performed 1 There was a problem that it was easy to become a uniform game, such as emphasizing the result of each lottery.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adding the game playability of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state when the start condition is satisfied a plurality of times. That is, the game ball to the second starting portion is provided with the game property that the game ball is entered into the first starting portion a plurality of times in a stepwise manner via the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state. It is possible to add the game playability of transitioning to the second advantageous game state according to the result of one lottery by the entry of.

Further, if the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspending means when the game ball first enters the first starting portion and the game ball transits to the first advantageous game state, it is suspended after the easy winning game state. It is possible to start the variable display in which the lottery result as to whether or not the game state is changed to another game state is displayed as result information by the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the subsequent first starting portion. In this case, since the game state to be transitioned from the normal game state according to the condition for transitioning to another game state according to the condition advantageous for the player is determined, the player displays the variation display before the winning easy game state. It is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the gaming state, which is more advantageous than when expecting result information for the result information, and to add a game feature of watching the display of the result information corresponding to the winning. Therefore, it is possible to add a game property that expands the expectation of transitioning to the second advantageous game state in stages.

In addition, when a plurality of game balls enter the first starting portion, the result information indicating whether or not to transit to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed when transiting to the second advantageous gaming state via the first advantageous gaming state. An easy-winning winning gaming state occurs before displaying, and the player can be given a predetermined gaming value by entering a gaming ball into the variable winning portion once during the transition. For this reason, when a non-winning is expected while expecting a transition to the second advantageous game state, it is possible to expect the winning of the first starting portion again and to easily continue the game.

Further, when the execution of the variable display is not suspended by the suspending means when the game ball is first entered into the first starting portion and the transition to the first advantageous gaming state is made, the gaming state control means causes the winning easy gaming state to be changed. It is possible to generate an easy entry state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion by the entry easy control later. For this reason, the change display that expects a transition to the second advantageous game state is executed promptly, the game proceeds smoothly, and the player feels depressed due to spending a lot of time until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be suppressed.

In the description of the feature 80, the first advantageous game state is an advantageous game state in which the upper limit number of games is set to a first number of times of 1 or more, and the second advantageous game state is that the upper limit number of games is the first number of times. The advantage game state may be set to a larger number of times of the second number, so that a plurality of times of start is performed by simple control such that the initial setting value of the number of times in the advantage game state is changed depending on the length of the upper limit game number. It is possible to add a game property that suitably shifts to an advantageous game state depending on the establishment of the condition.

<Characteristic 81>
A gaming machine according to feature 80,
A third starting part which is provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the first starting part separately from the second starting part and which establishes the second predetermined condition;
The lottery means performs the lottery under the condition of winning with the same probability in the case where the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous game state and the case where the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, in the normal gaming state, the player can perform the game without changing the operation, aiming at the entry of the game ball into both the first starting portion and the third starting portion. It is possible to expect the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition that the lottery with different transition patterns to the second advantageous game state is performed at the same time.

<Feature 82>
A gaming machine described in feature 81,
As the display device, variable display can be executed in a common display mode when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous game state and when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state. A gaming machine comprising a display device capable of displaying result information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery in a common display mode after the variable display.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state can be expressed by a common mode even when different starting conditions are satisfied in different gaming states, so that the player can transit. It is possible to clearly show that the possible advantageous game states are common. In addition, even if either one of the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the first advantageous game state and the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition in the normal game state has a very low probability and is rare, It is possible to experience the mode of variable display in advance by satisfying another predetermined condition. For this reason, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game is confused by the accidental establishment of the predetermined condition without knowing what the game is like.

<Characteristic 90>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down through a predetermined entrance,
A lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (starting prize of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (starting prize of the second special symbol) is established.
When the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a variable display is performed, and after the variable display, a display device capable of displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery (special symbol display devices 471, 472). , Decorative pattern display devices 479, 779),
If another predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the variable display by the display device, execution of the variable display for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition can be held up to a predetermined maximum number of times (holding means (main control board 920)). Part),
A first starting portion (lower middle starting winning device 431) that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters
A second starting portion (right starting winning device 432) that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently, and satisfies the second predetermined condition when the game balls enter;
A variable winning portion (central prize winning device 434) that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player when the game balls enter.
Game state control means (one of the main control board 920) for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of a game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of a game ball in the variable winning portion. Section) and
As the game state,
A normal game state in which a game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting portion,
An easy prize winning game state (special game state) including a period that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state and the variable prize unit takes a state in which a game ball easily enters,
The result information corresponding to the non-win (miss) of the predetermined lottery is included, including one or more variable displays executed after the easy winning game state and a display of the result information after the one or more variable displays. In the case of a game state that transitions to another game state when displayed until reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games, and when the result information corresponding to the winning (big hit) of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information. The advantageous game state in which the game state to be transitioned after the result information is displayed is determined by the condition that the player is more likely to transit to the game state that is more advantageous than the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the normal game state is provided. ,
The game state control means,
An entry normal control for controlling the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and a game ball entering the second starting portion from the normal game state during the advantageous game state. To perform an easy-entry control for generating an easy-entry-easy state,
In the advantageous game state, when the variation display of the number of times reaching the upper limit number of games is being executed, control is performed to generate a state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting portion by the entry normal control. A gaming machine to do.

In the conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters the starting opening during the normal gaming state and the variation display is executed with the start winning, and if the big hit is won by the lottery based on the start winning, the big hit is won. There is known a configuration in which a corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed and then a special game state is entered, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can be won into a winning opening. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning occurs during execution of the variable display based on the start winning, the execution of the variable display for the other starting winning can be held up to a predetermined maximum number. A configuration having a holding function is also known. Furthermore, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state, or in a probability variation gaming state, or in a gaming state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the starting opening than in the normal gaming state. It is also known that such a situation occurs, and those game states can be continued up to a predetermined upper limit number of times of play, thereby diversifying the game.

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in controlling a game that transits between a plurality of types of gaming states.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing control of a game that transits between a plurality of types of gaming states. That is, as a control for generating a state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion in a situation in which the variable display of the number of times of reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state is being executed, not the entry easy control but the entry normal control Is selected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during execution of the variable display of the number of times of reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the number of times of the second starting unit is close to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state. It is possible to easily suppress the number of game balls entering the game. Therefore, when the entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is extremely easy to make a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the first starting portion, a game in the first starting portion and the second starting portion It is possible to suitably transition between the game states in a situation where a difference is provided in the state transition conditions.

<Characteristic 91>
In the gaming machine described in feature 90,
As the advantageous game state, a first advantageous game state (short-term short game period) set to a first upper limit game number that is the same as or smaller than the maximum number of times that the execution of the variable display can be suspended by the suspending means. State) is provided,
The game state control means, as the easy entry control, generates the easy entry state when a predetermined easy entry condition (winning of a normal symbol lottery) is satisfied, and after the easy entry state is generated, the first easy entry state is generated. 2 When it is detected that the same number of game balls as the first upper limit number of games has entered the starting portion, the state is changed to an entry prohibited state in which entry of the game balls into the second starting portion is prohibited, and the entry prohibited state. After the transition to, the game machine is characterized by performing control to generate a state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting portion by the entry normal control.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, a sufficient right to play the unit game can be reserved before the start of the first advantageous game state, so that the game is completed after the transition to the first advantageous game state. It is possible to generate a situation in which the game ball does not have to enter the game area during the period up to. Therefore, in the first advantageous game state, the player can concentrate his/her consciousness on the variation display and the result information display during the execution without entering the game ball into the game area. It is possible to increase the expectation of the transition to the game state.

In addition, in the first advantageous game state, in the situation where the variable display of the number of times of reaching the upper limit number of games is being executed, the control for the second starting portion is performed by the entry normal control, so that the entry operation of the game ball into the game area is performed. Even if it is not executed, the player is unlikely to suffer a disadvantage, and it is possible to easily ensure fairness among the players depending on whether or not the entry operation is executed.

In addition, in the description of the feature 91, it is preferable to set the first upper limit number of games to one, so that if the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspending means even once, the first advantageous game state is set. It is possible to secure the necessary right of the unit game by the end, and it is possible to easily set the winning condition of the predetermined lottery for that one time to be high. Therefore, it is possible to aggregate the length of the first advantageous game state in a short period of time and maximize the expectation of transition to the second advantageous game state in the first advantageous game state.

Further, instead of the description of the easy entry control in the feature 91, the game state control means, as the easy entry control, the first upper limit number of games when a predetermined easy entry condition (winning of a normal symbol lottery) is satisfied. The same number of game balls may be set as the maximum allowable number of entries to generate the easy entry state.

<Characteristic 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or 91,
The game state control means, when the execution of the variable display for the upper limit number of games constituting the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspending means at the timing when the short-term time saving game state is started, the time saving state After the start of the operation, the game ball of one ball is also transited to the non-time saving state in a short time that cannot enter the second starting portion by the entry easy control, and the game ball enters the second starting portion by the entry normal control. A gaming machine characterized by performing control for generating a state that is easy to play.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the execution of the variable display for the upper limit number of games constituting the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspending means at the timing when the short-time short game state is started, the entry is easy. Depending on the control, the game ball cannot enter the second starting portion. Therefore, in the short-time and short-time gaming state, it is easy for the player to suffer a disadvantage even if the operation of entering the game ball into the gaming area is not performed, and an expectation of transition to the second advantageous gaming state. Can be easily increased.

<Feature A0>
A game area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and the player can change the flow-down start position in the game area. In the game area, a predetermined first operation state by the player ( A first flow-down area (flow-down area on the left side of the central structure 420) in which the game ball flows down depending on the left-handed game state), and an area different from the first flow-down area and different from the first operation state. A game machine provided with a second flow-down area (flow-down area on the right side of the central structure 420) in which a game ball flows down by two operation states (right-handed game state),
A lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (starting prize of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (starting prize of the second special symbol) is established.
When the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a variable display is performed, and after the variable display, a display device capable of displaying result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result (special symbol display devices 471, 472, Decorative pattern display device 479, 779),
If another predetermined condition is satisfied while the variable display is being executed by the display device, the variable display is executed for a predetermined maximum number of times for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition (the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied). With respect to each of the establishment of (4) and a holding means (a part of the main control board 920) capable of holding up to 4 times,
A first starter (lower middle start winning device 431) that is provided in the first flow-down area and satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters
A second starter which is provided in the second flow-down area, takes a plurality of states in which the game balls have different easiness of entering, and the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied when the game balls enter;
A variable winning portion (central prize winning device 434) that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player when the game balls enter.
Game state control means (one of the main control board 920) for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of a game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of a game ball in the variable winning portion. Part),
In each game state controlled by the game state control means, operation instruction information output means (one of the main control board 920) for outputting operation instruction information corresponding to execution of the game in the first operation state or the second operation state. Section, a decorative pattern display device 479, a light-emitting body of the central structure 420, acoustic devices 281, 282),
As the game state,
A first-side game state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the first flow-down region flow down than the second flow-down region,
An easy prize winning game state including a period that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won and the variable prize unit takes a state in which a game ball easily enters,
The result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined, including one or more variable displays executed after the easy winning game state and display of the result information after the one or more variable displays. The game state in which the game state transitions to the first side game state when displayed until reaching the upper limit number of games, and when the result information corresponding to winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information, the first There is provided an advantageous game state in which the game state to be transitioned after the result information is displayed is determined depending on the condition that the player is more likely to transit to the advantageous game state than the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the side game state. ,
The operation instruction information output means,
First operation instruction information output means for outputting first operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state during the first side game state,
Second operation instruction information output means for outputting second operation instruction information corresponding to execution of the game in the second operation state during the special game state and the advantageous game state,
Before the end of the special game state or before the end of the advantageous game state, the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times or more required until the upper limit number of times of game is reached in the advantageous game state to be transitioned after is executed. A game machine comprising a second operation instruction non-outputting means for generating a period in which the second operation instruction information is not output when the game machine is held by the holding means.

In the conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters the starting opening during the normal gaming state and the variation display is executed with the start winning, and if the big hit is won by the lottery based on the start winning, the big hit is won. There is known a configuration in which a corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed and then a special game state is entered, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can be won into a winning opening. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning occurs during execution of the variable display based on the start winning, the execution of the variable display for the other starting winning can be held up to a predetermined maximum number. A configuration having a holding function is also known. Furthermore, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state, or in a probability variation gaming state, or in a gaming state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the starting opening than in the normal gaming state. It is also known that such a situation occurs, and those game states can be continued up to a predetermined upper limit number of times of play, thereby diversifying the game.

In the above conventional gaming machine, it is preferable that the gaming machine maker side allows the player to appropriately recognize the operation related to the game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states, and there is still room for improvement.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to suitably recognize the operation related to the game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states. That is, before the end of the special game state, or before the end of the advantageous game state, execution of the variable display of the remaining number of times or more required to reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspending means. In the above, the predetermined condition for the variable display necessary until the advantageous game state is ended without the player playing the second operation state is already satisfied. In this case, since the second operation instruction non-output means causes a period during which the second operation instruction information is not output, aiming at execution of more variable display than the number necessary for execution of the advantageous game state for the player. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls are consumed extra.

<Feature A1>
A gaming machine according to feature A0,
A second operation that outputs second operation instruction prohibition information for at least not executing a game in the second operation state during a period in which the second operation instruction non-output means does not output the second operation instruction information. A game machine having a prohibition information output means.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, it is possible to easily show the player that it is unnecessary to execute the game in the second operation state.

It should be noted that at least one feature described in Features 10 to A1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or multiple features. The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operation means, and a passage part for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in a game area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating drum type game machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the design after the stop. A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

100... Gaming machine, 281, 282... Acoustic device, 431... Lower middle starting prize device, 432... Right starting prize device, 434... Central prize device, 471, 472... Special symbol display device, 479, 779... Decorative symbol Display device 611B: Roof, 612A, 613A... Ornament part, 612D, 613D... Projection part, 620... Passage port, 622C... Stage, 623... Downflow control part, 639... General winning device, 652... Left downflow passage, 653... Right downflow passage, 652A, 653A... Recessed portion, 920... Main control board

Claims (1)

A game area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and the player can change the flow-down start position in the game area. In the game area, a predetermined first operation state by the player is set. A first flow-down area in which the game ball flows down and a second flow-down area in which the game ball flows down in a second operation state different from the first operation state and different from the first operation state are provided. A gaming machine,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied,
A display device capable of performing variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result after the variable display,
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the variable display by the display device, a holding means capable of holding the execution of the variable display for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starter which is provided in the first flow-down area and which fulfills the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters;
A second starter which is provided in the second flow-down area, takes a plurality of states in which the game balls have different easiness of entering, and the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied when the game balls enter;
A variable winning portion that takes a plurality of states in which the game balls enter differently and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game balls enter,
A game state control means for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entering the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entering the game ball in the variable winning portion,
Operation instruction information output means for outputting operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state or the second operation state in each game state controlled by the game state control means,
As the game state,
A first-side game state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the first flow-down region flow down than the second flow-down region,
An easy prize winning game state including a period that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won and the variable prize unit takes a state in which a game ball easily enters,
The result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined, including one or more variable displays executed after the easy winning game state and display of the result information after the one or more variable displays. The game state in which the game state transitions to the first side game state when displayed until reaching the upper limit number of games, and when the result information corresponding to winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information, the first There is provided an advantageous game state in which the game state to be transitioned after the result information is displayed is determined depending on the condition that the player is more likely to transit to the advantageous game state than the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the side game state. ,
The operation instruction information output means,
First operation instruction information output means for outputting first operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state during the first side game state,
Second operation instruction information output means for outputting second operation instruction information corresponding to execution of the game in the second operation state during the easy winning game state and the advantageous game state,
In the case where the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times necessary for reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state to be transitioned thereafter is suspended by the suspending means before the end of the easy winning game state Or, before the end of the advantageous game state, when the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times or more necessary for reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspension means, A gaming machine comprising a second operation instruction non-outputting means for generating a period during which the second operation instruction information is not output.